related expressions

υἱός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) prim. ‘son’

① a male who is in a kinship relationship either biologically or by legal action, son, offspring, descendant

ⓐ the direct male issue of a person, son τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:21; GJs 14:2 (cp. Mel., P. 8, 53 ὡς γὰρ υἱὸς τεχθείς). Cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14) and 25; 10:37 (w. θυγάτηρ); Mk 12:6a; Lk 1:13, 31, 57; 11:11; 15:11 (on this JEngel, Die Parabel v. Verlorenen Sohn: ThGl 18, 1926, 54–64; MFrost, The Prodigal Son: Exp. 9th ser., 2, 1924, 56–60; EBuonaiuti, Religio 11, ’35, 398–402); Ac 7:29; Ro 9:9 (cp. Gen 18:10); Gal 4:22 al. W. gen. Mt 7:9; 20:20f; 21:37ab; Mk 6:3; 9:17; Lk 3:2; 4:22; 15:19; J 9:19f; Ac 13:21; 16:1; 23:16; Gal 4:30abc (Gen 21:10abc); Js 2:21; AcPlCor 2:29. Also ἐγὼ Φαρισαῖός εἰμι υἱὸς Φαρισαίων Ac 23:6 is prob. a ref. to direct descent. μονογενὴς υἱός (s. μονογενής 1) Lk 7:12. ὁ υἱὸς ὁ πρωτότοκος (πρωτότοκος 1) 2:7.

ⓑ the immediate male offspring of an animal (Ps 28:1 υἱοὺς κριῶν; Sir 38:25. So Lat. filius: Columella 6, 37, 4) in our lit. only as foal ἐπὶ πῶλον υἱὸν ὑποζυγίου Mt 21:5 (cp. Zech 9:9 πῶλον νέον).

ⓒ human offspring in an extended line of descent, descendant, son Ἰωσὴφ υἱὸς Δαυίδ Mt 1:20 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 73); s. 2dα below. υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ (Ἰσραήλ 1) Mt 27:9; Lk 1:16; Ac 5:21; 7:23, 37; 9:15; 10:36; Ro 9:27; 2 Cor 3:7, 13; Hb 11:22 al.; AcPlCor 2:32. οἱ υἱοὶ Λευί (Num 26:57) Hb 7:5. υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ Lk 19:9. υἱοὶ Ἀδάμ 1 Cl 29:2 (Dt 32:8). υἱοι Ῥουβήλ GJs 6:3.

ⓓ one who is accepted or legally adopted as a son (Herodian 5, 7, 1; 4; 5; Jos, Ant. 2, 263; 20, 150) Ac 7:21 (cp. Ex 2:10).—J 19:26.

② a pers. related or closely associated as if by ties of sonship, son, transf. sense of 1

ⓐ of a pupil, follower, or one who is otherw. a spiritual son (SIG 1169, 12 οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ=the pupils and helpers [40] of Asclepius; sim. Maximus Tyr. 4, 2c; Just., D. 86, 6 οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν.—Some combination w. παῖδες is the favorite designation for those who are heirs of guild-secrets or who are to perpetuate a skill of some kind: Pla., Rep. 3, 407e, Leg. 6, 769b; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verbi 22 p. 102, 4 Us./Rdm. ῥητόρων παῖδες; Lucian, Anach. 19, Dial. Mort. 11, 1 Χαλδαίων π.=dream-interpreters, Dips. 5 ἱατρῶν π., Amor. 49; Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 13 σοφῶν π.): the ‘sons’ of the Pharisees Mt 12:27; Lk 11:19. Peter says Μᾶρκος ὁ υἱός μου 1 Pt 5:13 (perh. w. a component of endearment; s. Μᾶρκος). As a familiar form of address by a cherished mentor Hb 12:5 (Pr 3:11; ParJer 5:28; 7:24). υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες B 1:1.

ⓑ of the individual members of a large and coherent group (cp. the υἷες Ἀχαιῶν in Homer; also PsSol 2:3 οἱ υἱοὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 15; LXX) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 Cl 8:3 (scripture quot. of unknown origin). υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραάμ Ac 13:26. οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Gen 11:5; Ps 11:2, 9; 44:3; TestLevi 3:10; TestZeb 9:7; GrBar 2:4) the sons of men=humans (cp. dγ below) Mk 3:28; Eph 3:5; 1 Cl 61:2 (of the earthly rulers in contrast to the heavenly king).

ⓒ of one whose identity is defined in terms of a relationship with a person or thing

α. of those who are bound to a personality by close, non-material ties; it is this personality that has promoted the relationship and given it its character: son(s) of: those who believe are υἱοὶ Ἀβραάμ, because Abr. was the first whose relationship to God was based on faith Gal 3:7. In a special sense the devout, believers, are sons of God, i.e., in the light of the social context, people of special status and privilege (cp. PsSol 17:27; Just., D, 124, 1; Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 8 ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ὄντως υἱός; Epict. 1, 9, 6; 1, 3, 2; 1, 19, 9; Sextus 58; 60; 135; 376a; Dt 14:1; Ps 28:1; 72:15; Is 43:6 [w. θυγατέρες μου]; 45:11; Wsd 2:18; 5:5; 12:21 al.; Jdth 9:4, 13; Esth 8:12q; 3 Macc 6:28; SibOr 3, 702) Mt 5:45; Lk 6:35; Ro 8:14, 19 (‘Redeemer figures’ EFuchs, Die Freiheit des Glaubens, ’49, 108; against him EHommel in ThViat 4, ’52, 118, n. 26); 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 6:18 (w. θυγατέρες, s. Is 43:6 cited above); Gal 3:26 (cp. PsSol 17:27); 4:6a, 7ab (here the υἱός is the κληρονόμος and his opposite is the δοῦλος); Hb 2:10 (JKögel, Der Sohn u. die Söhne: Eine exeget. Studie zu Hb 2:5–18, 1904); 12:5–8 (in vs. 8 opp. νόθος, q.v.); Rv 21:7; 2 Cl 1:4; B 4:9. Corresp. there are sons of the devil (on this subj. cp. Hdb. on J 8:44) υἱὲ διαβόλου Ac 13:10. οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ (masc.) Mt 13:38b. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἅιδου ApcPt Rainer. In υἱοί ἐστε τῶν φονευσάντων τοὺς προφήτας Mt 23:31 this mng. is prob. to be combined w. sense 1c. The expr. υἱοὶ θεοῦ Mt 5:9 looks to the future (s. Betz, SM ad loc.; cp. KKöhler, StKr 91, 1918, 189f). Lk 20:36a signifies a status akin to that of angels (Ps 88:7; θεῶν παῖδες as heavenly beings: Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a; 12a; 13, 6a.—Hierocles 3, 424 the ἄγγελοι are called θεῶν παῖδες; HWindisch, Friedensbringer-Gottessöhne: ZNW 24, 1925, 240–60, discounts connection w. angels and contends for the elevation of the ordinary followers of Jesus to the status of Alexander the Great in his role as an εἰρηνηποιός [cp. Plut., Mor. 329c]; for measured critique of this view s. Betz, SM 137–42.).

β. υἱός w. gen. of thing, to denote one who shares in it or who is worthy of it, or who stands in some other close relation to it, oft. made clear by the context; this constr. is prob. a Hebraism in the main, but would not appear barbaric (B-D-F §162, 6; Mlt-H. 441; Dssm., B p. 162–66 [BS 161–66]; PASA II 1884, no. 2 υἱὸς πόλεως [time of Nero; on this type of formulation SEG XXXIX, 1864]; IMagnMai 167, 5; 156, 12) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου (αἰών 2a) Lk 16:8a (opp. οἱ υἱοί τοῦ φωτός vs. 8b); 20:34. τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοί (to Mediterranean publics the functional equivalent of ἀθάνατοι ‘immortals’; cp. ἀνάστασις 2b) 20:36b. υἱοὶ τῆς ἀνομίας (ἀνομία 1; cp. CD 6:15) Hv 3, 6, 1; ApcPt 1:3; τῆς ἀπειθείας (s. ἀπείθεια) Eph 2:2; 5:6; Col 3:6; τῆς ἀπωλείας ApcPt 1:2. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας of Judas the informer J 17:12 (cp. similar expressions in Eur., Hec. 425; Menand., Dyscolus 88f: s. FDanker, NTS 7, ’60/61, 94), of the end-time adversary 2 Th 2:3. υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας (βασιλεία 1bη; s. SEG XXXIX, 1864 for related expressions) Mt 8:12; 13:38a. υἱοὶ βροντῆς Mk 3:17 (s. Βοανηργές). υἱὸς γεέννης (s. γέεννα) Mt 23:15; τ. διαθήκης (PsSol 17:15) Ac 3:25; εἰρήνης Lk 10:6. υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος (s. νυμφών) Mt 9:15; Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34. υἱὸς παρακλήσεως Ac 4:36 (s. Βαρναβᾶς). υἱοὶ (τοῦ) φωτός (Hippol., Ref. 6, 47, 4 in gnostic speculation) Lk 16:8b (opp. υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου); J 12:36. υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Th 5:5 (EBuonaiuti, ‘Figli del giorno e della luce’ [1 Th 5:5]: Rivista storico-critica delle Scienze teol. 6, 1910, 89–93).

ⓓ in various combinations as a designation of the Messiah and a self-designation of Jesus

α. υἱὸς Δαυίδ son of David of the Messiah (PsSol 17:21) Mt 22:42–45; Mk 12:35–37; Lk 20:41–44; B 12:10c. Specif. of Jesus as Messiah Mt 1:1a; 9:27; 12:23; 15:22; 20:30f; 21:9, 15; Mk 10:47f; Lk 18:38f.—WWrede, Jesus als Davidssohn: Vorträge u. Studien 1907, 147–77; WBousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921, 4, Rel.³ 226f; ELohmeyer, Gottesknecht u. Davidssohn ’45, esp. 68; 72; 77; 84; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 251–56; WMichaelis, Die Davidsohnschaft Jesu usw., in D. histor. Jesus u. d. kerygm. Christus, ed. Ristow and Matthiae, ’61, 317–30; LFisher, ECColwell Festschr. ’68, 82–97.

β. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, υἱὸς θεοῦ (the) Son of God (for the phrase s. JosAs 6:2 al. Ἰωσὴφ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ; there is no undisputed evidence of usage as messianic title in pre-Christian Judaism [s. Dalman, Worte 219–24, Eng. tr. 268–89; Bousset, Kyrios Christos² 53f; EHuntress, ‘Son of God’ in Jewish Writings Prior to the Christian Era: JBL 54, ’35, 117–23]; cp. 4Q 246 col. 2, 1 [JFitzmyer, A Wandering Aramean ’79, 90–93; JCollins, BRev IX/3, ’93, 34–38, 57]. Among polytheists on the other hand, sons of the gods in a special sense [s. Just., A I, 21, 1f] are not only known to myth and legend, but definite historical personalities are also designated as such. Among them are famous wise men such as Pythagoras and Plato [HUsener, Das Weihnachtsfest² 1911, 71ff], and deified rulers, above all the Roman emperors since the time of Augustus [oft. in ins and pap: Dssm., B 166f=BS 166f, LO 294f=LAE 346f; Thieme 33]. According to Memnon [I B.C./ I A.D.]: 434 Fgm. 1, 1, 1 Jac., Clearchus [IV B.C.] carried his boasting so far as Διὸς υἱὸν ἑαυτὸν ἀνειπεῖν. Also, persons who were active at that time as prophets and wonder-workers laid claim to the title υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, e.g. the Samaritan Dositheus in Origen, C. Cels. 6, 11; sim. an Indian wise man who calls himself Διὸς υἱός Arrian, Anab. 7, 2, 3; cp. Did., Gen. 213, 18 ὁ Ἀβρὰμ υἱὸς θεοῦ διὰ δικαιοσύνην. S. GWetter, ‘Der Sohn Gottes’ 1916; Hdb. exc. on J 1:34; s. also Clemen² 76ff; ENorden, Die Geburt des Kindes 1924, 75; 91f; 132; 156f; EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 1:11 [4th ed. ’50]; M-JLagrange, Les origines du dogme paulinien de la divinité de Christ: RB 45, ’36, 5–33; HPreisker, Ntl. Zeitgesch. ’37, 187–208; HBraun, ZTK 54, ’57, 353–64; ANock, ‘Son of God’ in Paul. and Hellen. Thought: Gnomon 33, ’61, 581–90 [=Essays on Religion and the Anc. World II, ’72, 928–39]—originality in Paul’s thought): Ps 2:7 is applied to Jesus υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε Lk 3:22 D; GEb 18, 37.—Ac 13:33; Hb 1:5a; 5:5; 1 Cl 36:4. Likew. Hos 11:1 (w. significant changes): Mt 2:15, and 2 Km 7:14: Hb 1:5b. The voice of God calls him ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός (s. ἀγαπητός 1) at his baptism Mt 3:17; Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; GEb 18, 37 and 39 and at the Transfiguration Mt 17:5; Mk 9:7; Lk 9:35 (here ἐκλελεγμένος instead of ἀγαπ.); 2 Pt 1:17. Cp. J 1:34. The angel at the Annunciation uses these expressions in referring to him: υἱὸς ὑψίστου Lk 1:32; GJs 11:3 and υἱὸς θεοῦ Lk 1:35 (Ar. 15, 1 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψίστου. Cp. Just., A I, 23, 2 μόνος ἰδίως υἱὸς τῷ θεῷ γεγέννηται). The centurion refers to him at the crucifixion as υἱὸς θεοῦ Mt 27:54; Mk 15:39; GPt 11:45; cp. vs. 46 (CMann, ET 20, 1909, 563f; JPobee, The Cry of the Centurion, A Cry of Defeat: CFDMoule Festschr. ’70, 91–102; EJohnson, JSNT 31, ’87, 3–22 [an indefinite affirmation of Jesus]). The high priest asks εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 26:63 (DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’71, 213–26). Passers-by ask him to show that he is God’s Son 27:40; sim. the devil 4:3, 6; Lk 4:3, 9. On the other hand, evil spirits address him as the Son of God Mt 8:29; Mk 3:11; 5:7; Lk 4:41; 8:28; and disciples testify that he is Mt 14:33; 16:16. S. also Mk 1:1 (s. SLegg, Ev. Sec. Marc. ’35).—Jesus also refers to himself as Son of God, though rarely apart fr. the Fourth Gosp.: Mt 28:19 (the Risen Lord in the trinitarian baptismal formula); Mt 21:37f=Mk 12:6 (an allusion in the parable of the vinedressers).—Mt 27:43; Mk 13:32; Rv 2:18. The main pass. is the so-called Johannine verse in the synoptics Mt 11:27=Lk 10:22 (s. PSchmiedel, PM 4, 1900,1–22; FBurkitt, JTS 12, 1911, 296f; HSchumacher, Die Selbstoffenbarung Jesu bei Mt 11:27 [Lk 10:22] 1912 [lit.]; Norden, Agn. Th. 277–308; JWeiss, Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 120–29, Urchristentum 1917, 87ff; Bousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921, 45ff; EMeyer I 280ff; RBultmann, Gesch. d. synopt. Trad.² ’31, 171f; MDibelius, Die Formgeschichte des Evangeliums² ’33, 259; MRist, Is Mt 11:25–30 a Primitive Baptismal Hymn? JR 15, ’35, 63–77; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi: E. Studie zu Mt 11:25–30, ’37; WDavies, ‘Knowledge’ in the Dead Sea Scrolls and Mt 11:25–30, HTR 45, ’53, 113–39; WGrundmann, Sohn Gottes, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; JBieneck, Sohn Gottes als Christusbez. der Synopt. ’51; PWinter, Mt 11:27 and Lk 10:22: NovT 1, ’56, 112–48; JJocz, Judaica 13, ’57, 129–42; OMichel/OBetz, Von Gott Gezeugt, Beih. ZNW [Jeremias Festschr.] 26, ’60, 3–23 [Qumran]).—Apart fr. the synoptics, testimony to Jesus as the Son of God is found in many parts of our lit. Oft. in Paul: Ro 1:3, 4, 9; 5:10; 8:3, 29, 32; 1 Cor 1:9; 15:28; 2 Cor 1:19; Gal 1:16; 2:20; 4:4; Eph 4:13; Col 1:13; 1 Th 1:10. Cp. Ac 9:20. In Hb: 1:2, 8; 4:14; 5:8; 6:6; 7:3, 28; 10:29. In greatest frequency in John (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 6 the Λόγος as υἱὸς θεοῦ. Likew. Philo, Agr. 51 πρωτόγονος υἱός, Conf. Lingu. 146 υἱὸς θεοῦ.—Theoph. Ant. 2, 1 [p. 154, 12] ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν καὶ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ; Iren. 3, 12, 2 [Harv. II 55, 2]): J 1:49; 3:16–18 (s. μονογενής 2), 35f; 5:19–26; 6:40; 8:35f; 10:36; 11:4, 27; 14:13; 17:1; 19:7; 20:31; 1J 1:3, 7; 2:22–24; 3:8, 23; 4:9f, 14f; 5:5, 9–13, 20; 2J 3, 9.—B 5:9, 11; 7:2, 9; 12:8; 15:5; Dg 7:4; 9:2, 4; 10:2 (τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ τὸν μονογενῆ; also ApcEsdr 6:16 p. 31, 22 Tdf.; ApcSed 9:1f); IMg 8:2; ISm 1:1; MPol 17:3; Hv 2, 2, 8; Hs 5, 2, 6 (ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ ἀγαπητός); 8; 11; 5, 4, 1; 5, 5, 2; 3; 5; 5, 6, 1; 2; 4; 7 (on the Christology of the Shepherd s. Dibelius, Hdb. on Hs 5, also ALink and JvWalter [πνεῦμα 5cα]); Hs 8, 3, 2; 8, 11, 1. Cp. 9, 1, 1; 9, 12, 1ff.—In trinitarian formulas, in addition to Mt 28:19, also IMg 13:1; EpilMosq 5; D 7:1, 3.—The deceiver of the world appears w. signs and wonders ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ D 16:4 (ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 28, 32 Tdf. ὁ λέγων• Ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ [of Antichrist]).—EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 16–44; GVos, The Self-disclosure of Jesus 1926.—EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 404–17; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 211–36; MHengel, The Son of God (tr. JBowden) ’76; DJones, The Title υἱὸς θεοῦ in Acts: SBLSP 24, ’85, 451–63.

γ. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου lit. ‘the son of the man’ (the pl. form οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων appears freq. in the LXX to render בְּנֵי אָדָם = mortals, e.g. Gen 11:5; Ps 10:4; 11:2; cp. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπολείας J 17:12 [s. 2cβ]) ‘the human being, the human one, the man’ in our lit. only as a byname in ref. to Jesus and in an exclusive sense the Human One, the Human Being, one intimately linked with humanity in its primary aspect of fragility yet transcending it, traditionally rendered ‘the Son of Man.’ The term is found predom. in the gospels, where it occurs in the synoptics about 70 times (about half as oft. if parallels are excluded), and in J 12 times (s. EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 8:31). In every case the title is applied by Jesus to himself. Nowhere within a saying or narrative about him is it found in an address to him: Mt 8:20; 9:6; 10:23; 11:19; 12:8, 32, 40; 13:37, 41; 16:13, 27f; 17:9, 12, 22; 18:10 [11] v.l.; 19:28; 20:18, 28; 24:27, 30, 37, 39, 44; 25:13 v.l., 31; 26:2, 24ab, 45, 64; Mk 2:10, 28; 8:31, 38; 9:9, 12, 31; 10:33, 45; 13:26; 14:21ab, 41, 62; Lk 5:24; 6:5, 22; 7:34; 9:22, 26, 44, 56 v.l., 58; 11:30; 12:8, 10, 40; 17:22, 24, 26, 30; 18:8, 31; 19:10; 21:27, 36; 22:22, 48, 69; 24:7.—John (FGrosheide, Υἱὸς τ. ἀνθρ. in het Evang. naar Joh.: TSt 35, 1917, 242–48; HDieckmann, D. Sohn des Menschen im J: Scholastik 2, 1927, 229–47; HWindisch, ZNW 30, ’31, 215–33; 31, ’32, 199–204; WMichaelis, TLZ 85, ’60, 561–78 [Jesus’ earthly presence]) 1:51; 3:13, 14; 5:27 (BVawter, Ezekiel and John, CBQ 26, ’64, 450–58); 6:27, 53, 62; 8:28; 9:35; 12:23, 34; 13:31. Whether the component of fragility (suggested by OT usage in ref. to the brief span of human life and the ills to which it falls heir) or high status (suggested by traditions that appear dependent on Da 7:13, which refers to one ‘like a human being’), or a blend of the two dominates a specific occurrence can be determined only by careful exegesis that in addition to extra-biblical traditions takes account of the total literary structure of the document in which it occurs. Much neglected in the discussion is the probability of prophetic association suggested by the form of address Ezk 2:1 al. (like the OT prophet [Ezk 3:4–11] Jesus encounters resistance).—On Israelite thought contemporary w. Jesus and alleged knowledge of a heavenly being looked upon as a ‘Son of Man’ or ‘Man’, who exercises Messianic functions such as judging the world (metaph., pictorial passages in En 46–48; 4 Esdr 13:3, 51f) s. Bousset, Rel.³ 352–55; NMessel, D. Menschensohn in d. Bilderreden d. Hen. 1922; ESjöberg, Kenna 1 Henok och 4 Esra tanken på den lidande Människosonen? Sv. Ex. Årsb. 5, ’40, 163–83, D. Menschensohn im äth. Hen. ’46. This view is in some way connected w. Da 7:13; acc. to some it derives its real content fr. an eschatological tradition that ultimately goes back to Iran (WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 160–223; Reitzenstein, Erlösungsmyst. 119ff, ZNW 20, 1921, 18–22, Mysterienrel.³ 418ff; Clemen² 72ff; CKraeling, Anthropos and Son of Man: A Study in the Religious Syncretism of the Hellenistic Orient 1927); acc. to this tradition the First Man was deified; he will return in the last times and usher in the Kingdom of God.—Outside the gospels: Ac 7:56 (v.l. τοῦ θεοῦ; GKilpatrick, TZ 21, ’65, 209); Rv 1:13; 14:14 (both after Da 7:13; sim. allusion to Da in Just., D. 31, 1). The quot. fr. Ps 8:5 in Hb 2:6 prob. does not belong here, since there is no emphasis laid on υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου. In IEph 20:2 Jesus is described as υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱὸς θεοῦ. Differently B 12:10 Ἰησοῦς, οὐχὶ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἀλλὰ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Jesus, not a man’s son, but Son of God.—HLietzmann, Der Menschensohn 1896; Dalman, Worte 191–219 (Eng. tr., 234–67); Wlh., Einl.² 123–30; PFiebig, Der Menschensohn 1901; NSchmidt, The Prophet of Nazareth 1905, 94–134, Recent Study of the Term ‘Son of Man’: JBL 45, 1926, 326–49; FTillmann, Der Menschensohn 1907; EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 65ff; HHoltzmann, Das messianische Bewusstsein Jesu, 1907, 49–75 (lit.), Ntl. Theologie² I 1911, 313–35; FBard, D. Sohn d. Menschen 1908; HGottsched, D. Menschensohn 1908; EAbbott, ‘The Son of Man’, etc., 1910; EHertlein, Die Menschensohnfrage im letzten Stadium 1911, ZNW 19, 1920, 46–48; JMoffatt, The Theology of the Gospels 1912, 150–63; WBousset, Kyrios Christos² 1921, 5–22 (the titles of the works by Wernle and Althaus opposing his first edition [1913], as well as Bousset’s answer, are found s.v. κύριος, end); DVölter, Jesus der Menschensohn 1914, Die Menschensohnfrage neu untersucht 1916; FSchulthess, ZNW 21, 1922, 247–50; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919 (see also the works by the same author referred to above in this entry); EMeyer II 335ff; HGressmann, ZKG n.s. 4, 1922, 170ff, D. Messias 1929, 341ff; GDupont, Le Fils d’Homme 1924; APeake, The Messiah and the Son of Man 1924; MWagner, Der Menschensohn: NKZ 36, 1925, 245–78; Guillaume Baldensperger, Le Fils d’Homme: RHPR 5, 1925, 262–73; WBleibtreu, Jesu Selbstbez. als der Menschensohn: StKr 98/99, 1926, 164–211; AvGall, Βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 1926; OProcksch, D. Menschensohn als Gottessohn: Christentum u. Wissensch. 3, 1927, 425–43; 473–81; CMontefiore, The Synoptic Gospels² 1927 I 64–80; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34, Eng. tr. The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf² ’43; EWechssler, Hellas im Ev. ’36, 332ff; PParker, The Mng. of ‘Son of Man’: JBL 60, ’41, 151–57; HSharman, Son of Man and Kingdom of God ’43; JCampbell, The Origin and Mng. of the Term Son of Man: JTS 48, ’47, 145–55; HRiesenfeld, Jésus Transfiguré ’47, 307–13 (survey and lit.); TManson, ConNeot 11, ’47, 138–46 (Son of Man=Jesus and his disciples in Mk 2:27f); GDuncan, Jesus, Son of Man ’47, 135–53 (survey); JBowman, ET 59, ’47/48, 283–88 (background); MBlack, ET 60, ’48f, 11–15; 32–36; GKnight, Fr. Moses to Paul ’49, 163–72 (survey); TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 237–50; TManson (Da, En and gospels), BJRL 32, ’50, 171–93; TPreiss, Le Fils d’Homme: ÉThR 26/3, ’51, Life in Christ, ’54, 43–60; SMowinckel, He That Cometh, tr. Anderson, ’54, 346–450; GIber, Überlieferungsgesch. Unters. z. Begriff des Menschensohnes im NT, diss. Heidelb. ’53; ESjöberg, D. verborgene Menschensohn in den Ev. ’55; WGrundmann, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; HRiesenfeld, The Mythological Backgrd. of NT Christology, CHDodd Festschr. ’56, 81–95; PhVielhauer, Gottesreich u. Menschensohn in d. Verk. Jesu, GDehn Festschr. ’57, 51–79; ESidebottom, The Son of Man in J, ET 68, ’57, 231–35; 280–83; AHiggins, Son of Man- Forschung since (Manson’s) ‘The Teaching of Jesus’: NT Essays (TW Manson memorial vol.) ’59, 119–35; HTödt, D. Menschensohn in d. synopt. Überl. ’59 (tr. Barton ’65); JMuilenburg, JBL 79, ’60, 197–209 (Da, En); ESchweizer, JBL 79, ’60, 119–29 and NTS 9, ’63, 256–61; BvIersel, ‘Der Sohn’ in den synopt. Jesusworten, ’61 (community?); MBlack, BJRL 45, ’63, 305–18; FBorsch, ATR 45, ’63, 174–90; AHiggins, Jesus and the Son of Man, ’64; RFormesyn, NovT 8, ’66, 1–35 (barnasha=‘I’); SSandmel, HSilver Festschr. ’63, 355–67; JJeremias, Die älteste Schicht der Menschensohn-Logien, ZNW 58, ’67, 159–72; GVermes, MBlack, Aram. Approach³, ’67, 310–30; BLindars, The New Look on the Son of Man: BJRL 63, ’81, 437–62; WWalker, The Son of Man, Some Recent Developments CBQ 45, ’83, 584–607; JDonahue, Recent Studies on the Origin of ‘Son of Man’ in the Gospels, CBQ 48, ’86, 584–607; DBurkitt, The Nontitular Son of Man, A History and Critique: NTS 40, ’94 504–21 (lit.); JEllington, BT 40, ’89, 201–8; RGordon, Anthropos: 108–13.—B. 105; DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] word

[English Plural] words

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

[Related Words] nena

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno lililotoholewa

[Swahili Plural] maneno yaliyotoholewa

[English Word] adopted word

[English Plural] adopted words

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

[Terminology] grammar

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno la kweli

[Swahili Plural] maneno ya kweli

[English Word] true word

[English Plural] true words

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] expression

[English Plural] expressions

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

[Related Words] nena

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] utterance

[English Plural] utterances

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

[Related Words] nena

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] statement

[English Plural] statements

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] assertion

[English Plural] assertions

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] (important) matter

[English Plural] important matters

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

[Swahili Example] neno hili limetukasirisha

[English Example] this matter has annoyed us

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] affair

[English Plural] affairs

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] (matter for) concern

[English Plural] concerns

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno

[Swahili Plural] maneno

[English Word] objection

[English Plural] objections

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

[Swahili Example] sina neno

[English Example] I have no objection

------------------------------------------------------------

[Swahili Word] neno siri

[Swahili Plural] maneno siri

[English Word] secret

[English Plural] secrets

[Part of Speech] noun

[Class] 5/6

------------------------------------------------------------

IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysis

JAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association

SE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)

PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)

PQ - Psychoanalytic Quarterly

WAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)

PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)

\

О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts

\

1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.

2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.

3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.

5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.

6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.

7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.

8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.

9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.

10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.

11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.

12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.

14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.

15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.

16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.

17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.

18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.

19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.

20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.

21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.

22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.

23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.

24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.

25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.

27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.

28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.

29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.

31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.

32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.

33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.

34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.

36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.

37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.

38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.

39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.

40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.

41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).

42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.

43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.

44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.

45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.

46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.

47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.

48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.

49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.

50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.

51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.

52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.

53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.

54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.

55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.

56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.

57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.

58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.

59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.

60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.

61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.

62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.

63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.

64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.

65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.

66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.

67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.

68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.

69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.

70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.

71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.

72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.

73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.

74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.

75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.

76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.

77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).

78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.

79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.

80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.

81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.

82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.

83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.

85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.

86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.

87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.

88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.

89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.

90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.

91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.

92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.

93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.

94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.

95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.

96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.

97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.

98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.

99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.

100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.

101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.

102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.

103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.

104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.

105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.

106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.

107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.

110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.

111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.

112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.

113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.

114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.

115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.

116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.

117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.

119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.

120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.

121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.

122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.

123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.

124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.

125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.

126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.

127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.

128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.

129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.

130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.

133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.

134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.

135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.

136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.

137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.

140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.

141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.

142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.

143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.

144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.

145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.

146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.

147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.

148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.

149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.

150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.

151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.

152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.

153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.

154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.

155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.

156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.

157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.

158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.

159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.

160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.

161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.

162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.

163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.

164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.

165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.

166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.

167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.

168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.

170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.

171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.

172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.

173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.

174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.

175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.

176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.

177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.

178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.

179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.

180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.

181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.

183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.

184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.

185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.

186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.

187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.

188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.

189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.

190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.

191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.

192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.

193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.

195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.

196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.

198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.

199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.

200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.

201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.

202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.

203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.

204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.

205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.

206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.

207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.

208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.

210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.

211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.

212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.

214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.

215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.

216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.

218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.

219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.

220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.

221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.

222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.

223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.

224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.

225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.

226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.

227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.

228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.

229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.

230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).

231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.

232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.

233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.

235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.

236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.

237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.

238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.

239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.

240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.

241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.

242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.

243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.

244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).

245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.

246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.

247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.

248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.

249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.

250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.

251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.

252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.

253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.

254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.

255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.

256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.

257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.

258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.

259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.

260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.

261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.

262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.

263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.

264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.

265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.

266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.

267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.

268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.

269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.

270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.

271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.

272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.

273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.

274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.

275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.

276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.

277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.

278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.

279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.

280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.

281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.

282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.

283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.

284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.

285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.

286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.

287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.

288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.

289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.

290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.

291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.

292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.

293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.

294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.

295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.

296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.

297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.

298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.

299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.

300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.

301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.

302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.

303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.

304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.

305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.

306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.

307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.

308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.

309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.

310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.

311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.

312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.

313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.

314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.

315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.

316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.

317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.

318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.

319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.

320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.

321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.

322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.

323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.

324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.

325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.

326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.

327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.

328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.

330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.

331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.

332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.

335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.

336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.

337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.

338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.

339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).

340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).

341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.

342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.

344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).

345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.

346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.

347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.

348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.

349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.

350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.

353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.

354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.

355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.

356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.

357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.

358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.

359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.

360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.

362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).

365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.

366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.

367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.

368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.

369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.

371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.

372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.

373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.

374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.

375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.

376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.

377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.

379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.

380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.

381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.

383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.

384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.

385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.

386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.

387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.

390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.

391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.

392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.

394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.

395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).

396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.

397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.

399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.

401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.

402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.

403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.

404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.

405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.

406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.

407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.

409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).

410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.

411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.

412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.

414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.

415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.

416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.

417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.

418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.

419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.

420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.

421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.

422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.

423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.

424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.

425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.

426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).

427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.

428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.

429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.

430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.

432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.

433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.

434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.

435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.

436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.

437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.

438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.

439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.

440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.

441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).

442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.

443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.

444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.

445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.

446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.

447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.

449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.

450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.

451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.

455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.

457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.

458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.

459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.

460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.

461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.

462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.

463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.

464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.

465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.

466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.

467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.

468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.

469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.

470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.

471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.

473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.

474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.

475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.

476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.

477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.

478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.

479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.

480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.

481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.

482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.

483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.

484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.

485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.

486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.

487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).

488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.

489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.

490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.

491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.

492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.

493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.

494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.

495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.

496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.

498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.

499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.

501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.

502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.

503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.

504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.

505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.

506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.

507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.

508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.

510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.

511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.

512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.

514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.

516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.

517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.

518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.

519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.

521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.

522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.

524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.

525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.

526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.

527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.

529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.

530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.

531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.

532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.

533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.

534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.

535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.

536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.

538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.

539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.

540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.

541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.

543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.

544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.

545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.

546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).

547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.

548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.

549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.

550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.

551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.

552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.

553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.

554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.

555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.

556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.

558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.

560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.

561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.

562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.

564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.

565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.

566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.

567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.

568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.

569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.

570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.

571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.

572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.

573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.

576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.

577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.

578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.

579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.

580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.

581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.

582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.

585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.

586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.

587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.

589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.

590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.

591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.

592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.

593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.

595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.

596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.

597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.

598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.

599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.

600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.

601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.

602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.

604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.

606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).

608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.

609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.

610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.

611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.

612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.

613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.

614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.

615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.

617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.

618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.

619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.

621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.

622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.

623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.

624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.

626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.

627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.

628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.

629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.

631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.

633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.

634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.

635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.

636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.

637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.

638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.

639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.

640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.

641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.

642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.

644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.

645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.

646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.

647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.

648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.

649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.

650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.

652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.

653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.

654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.

655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.

656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.

657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.

658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.

659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.

660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.

661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.

662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.

663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.

664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.

665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.

666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.

667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.

668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.

669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.

670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.

671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.

672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.

673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.

674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.

675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.

676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.

677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.

678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.

679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.

681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.

682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.

684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.

685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.

686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.

687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.

688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.

690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.

691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.

692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.

693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.

695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.

696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.

697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.

698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.

699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.

700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.

702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.

703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.

704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).

705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.

706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.

707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.

708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.

709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.

710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.

711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.

712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.

713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.

714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.

715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.

716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.

717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.

718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.

719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.

721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.

722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.

723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.

724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.

725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.

726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.

727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.

728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.

729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.

730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.

731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).

733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.

734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.

735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.

736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.

737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.

738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.

739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.

740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.

741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.

742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.

743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.

744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.

745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.

746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.

747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.

748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.

750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.

751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.

752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.

753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.

754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.

755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.

756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.

757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.

759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.

760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.

762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.

763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.

764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.

765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.

766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.

768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.

769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.

770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.

771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.

772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.

773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.

774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.

775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.

776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.

777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.

778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.

779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.

780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.

781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.

782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.

783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.

784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.

785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.

787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.

788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.

789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.

790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.

791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.

792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.

793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.

794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.

795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.

796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.

797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.

798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.

799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.

800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.

801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.

802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.

803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.

806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.

807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.

808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.

809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.

810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.

811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.

812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.

813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.

814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.

815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.

816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.

817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.

818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.

819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.

820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).

821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.

822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.

823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.

824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.

825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.

826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.

828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.

829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.

830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.

831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.

832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.

833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.

834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.

835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.

836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.

837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.

838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.

839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.

840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.

841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.

842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.

843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.

844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.

845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.

846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.

847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.

848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.

849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).

850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.

852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.

853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.

854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.

855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).

856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.

857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.

858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.

861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.

862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).

864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.

865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.

866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.

867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.

868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.

869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.

870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.

871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.

872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.

873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.

874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.

875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.

876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.

877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.

878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.

879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.

880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.

881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.

882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.

883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.

884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.

885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).

886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.

887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.

888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).

889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.

891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.

892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.

894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.

895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.

897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.

898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.

899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.

900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.

901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.

902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.

903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.

904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.

905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.

cum (archaic form COM, found in an inscr., COM PREIVATVD; in MSS. sometimes quom or quum), prep. with abl. [for skom, Sanscr. root sak, together; cf. sequor, and Gr. koinos, sun], designates in gen. accompaniment, community, connection of one object with another (opp. sine, separatim, etc.), with, together, together with, in connection or company with, along with; sometimes also to be translated and.

In gen., Plaut. Am. prol. 95:

qui cum Amphitruone abiit hinc in exercitum,

id. ib. prol. 125:

cum Pansā vixi in Pompeiano,

Cic. Att. 14, 20, 4:

semper ille antea cum uxore, tum sine eā,

id. Mil. 21, 55:

quibuscum essem libenter,

id. Fam. 5, 21, 1; cf.:

cum quibus in ceteris intellegis afuisse,

id. Sull. 3, 7:

si cenas hodie mecum,

Hor. Ep. 1, 7, 70:

vagamur egentes cum conjugibus et liberis,

Cic. Att. 8, 2, 3:

errare malo cum Platone, etc.,

id. Tusc. 1, 17, 39:

qui unum imperium unumque magistratum cum ipsis habeant,

Caes. B. G. 2, 3 et saep.—

In an expression of displeasure:

in' hinc, quo dignus, cum donis tuis Tam lepidis,

Ter. Eun. 4, 3, 9; cf. Plaut. Most. 2, 2, 33; Ter. And. 5, 4, 38; id. Eun. 1, 2, 73; id. Heaut. 4, 6, 7 al.—

In a designation of time with which some action concurs:

egone abs te abii hinc hodie cum diluculo?

Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 121; so,

cum primo luci,

id. Cist. 2, 1, 58:

cras cum filio cum primo luci ibo hinc,

Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 55; Cic. Off. 3, 31, 112; cf.:

cum primā luce,

id. Att. 4, 3, 4; and:

cum primo lumine solis,

Verg. A. 7, 130: cum primo mane, Auct. B. Afr. 62: cum mane, Lucil. ap. Diom. p. 372 P:

pariter cum ortu solis,

Sall. J. 106, 5:

pariter cum occasu solis,

id. ib. 68, 2; cf.:

cum sole reliquit,

Verg. A. 3, 568 et saep.:

mane cum luci simul,

Plaut. Merc. 2, 1, 31; v. simul: exiit cum nuntio (i. e. at the same time with, etc.), Caes. B. G. 5, 46; cf.: cum his nuntius Romam ad consulendum redit ( = hama toisde), Liv. 1, 32, 10:

simul cum dono designavit templo Jovis fines,

id. 1, 10, 5; cf.:

et vixisse cum re publicā pariter, et cum illā simul extinctus esse videatur,

Cic. de Or. 3, 3, 10.—

In designating the relations, circumstances, way, and manner with which any act is connected, by which it is accompanied, under or in which it takes place, etc., with, in, under, in the midst of, among, to, at: aliquid cum malo suo facere, Plaut. Bacch. 3, 4, 4; cf.:

cum magnā calamitate et prope pernicie civitatis,

Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 24, § 63:

cum summā rei publicae salute et cum tuā peste ac pernicie cumque eorum exitio, qui, etc.,

id. Cat. 1, 13, 33:

cum magno provinciae periculo,

Caes. B. G. 1, 10:

cum summo probro,

Ter. And. 5, 3, 10: cum summo terrore hominum, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24, 6:

cum summā tuā dignitate,

Cic. Fin. 4, 22, 61:

cum bonā alite,

Cat. 61, 19:

ferendum hoc onus est cum labore,

Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 21; cf. Cic. N. D. 2, 23, 59:

multis cum lacrimis aliquem obsecrare,

amid many tears, Caes. B. G. 1, 20; cf.:

hunc ipsum abstulit magno cum gemitu civitatis,

Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 19, § 49:

orare cum lacrimis coepere,

Liv. 5, 30, 5:

si minus cum curā aut cautelā locus loquendi lectus est,

Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 6 Ritschl; so,

cum curā,

Cic. Inv. 1, 39, 70; Sall. J. 54, 1; Liv. 22, 42, 5 et saep.; cf.:

cum summo studio,

Sall. C. 51, 38:

cum quanto studio periculoque,

Liv. 8, 25, 12 al.:

cum multā venustate et omni sale,

Cic. Fin. 1, 3, 9:

summā cum celeritate ad exercitum rediit,

Hirt. B. G. 8, 52:

maximo cum clamore involant,

Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 89:

cum clamore,

Liv. 2, 23, 8; 5, 45, 2:

cum clamore ac tumultu,

id. 9, 31, 8; cf.:

Athenienses cum silentio auditi sunt,

id. 38, 10, 4; 7, 35, 1:

illud cum pace agemus,

Cic. Tusc. 5, 29, 83:

cum bonā pace,

Liv. 1, 24, 3; 21, 24, 5:

cum bonā gratiā,

Cic. Fat. 4, 7:

cum bonā veniā,

Liv. 29, 1, 7; cf.:

cum veniā,

Ov. Tr. 4, 1, 104; Quint. 10, 1, 72:

cum virtute vivere,

Cic. Fin. 3, 8, 29; cf. id. ib. 2, 11, 34:

cum judicio,

Quint. 10, 1, 8:

cum firmā memoriā,

id. 5, 10, 54:

legata cum fide ac sine calumniā persolvere,

Suet. Calig. 16:

spolia in aede... cum sollemni dedicatione dono fixit,

Liv. 4, 20, 3.—

Attributively, with subst.:

et huic proelium cum Tuscis ad Janiculum erat crimini,

Liv. 2, 52, 7 Weissenb. ad loc.:

frumenti cum summā caritate inopia erat,

id. 2, 12, 1; 2, 5, 2; 7, 29, 3.—

Cum eo quod, ut, or ne (in an amplification or limitation), with the circumstance or in the regard that, on or under the condition, with the exception, that, etc. (except once in Cic. epistt. not ante-Aug.).

Cum eo quod, with indic., Quint. 12, 10, 47 Spald.; 10, 7, 13; so,

cum eo quidem, quod, etc.,

id. 2, 4, 30. —With subj.:

sit sane, quoniam ita tu vis: sed tamen cum eo, credo, quod sine peccato meo fiat,

Cic. Att. 6, 1, 7.—

With ut:

Antium nova colonia missa cum eo, ut Antiatibus permitteretur, si et ipsi adscribi coloni vellent,

Liv. 8, 14, 8; so id. 8, 14, 2; 30, 10, 21; 36, 5, 3; Cels. 3, 22.—So with tamen:

cum eo tamen, ut nullo tempore is... non sit sustinendus,

Cels. 3, 5 fin.; 4, 6 fin. —

With ne:

obsequar voluntati tuae cum eo, ne dubites, etc.,

Col. 5, 1, 4:

cum eo, ne amplius quam has urant,

Cels. 7, 22; and with tamen:

cum eo tamen, ne, etc.,

id. 2, 17.—

Cum dis volentibus, etc., with God's help, by the will of the gods, sun theôi:

cum divis volentibus quodque bene eveniat mando tibi, Mani, etc.,

Cato, R. R. 141, 1: volentibu' cum magnis dis, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 12, 38:

agite, cum dis bene juvantibus arma capite,

Liv. 21, 43, 7; so,

cum superis,

Claud. Cons. Stil. III. p. 174.—

Cum with an ordinal number (cum octavo, cum decimo, etc.) for our - fold, in economical lang., of the multiplication of cultivated products:

ut ex eodem semine aliubi cum decimo redeat, aliubi cum quinto decimo,

ten-, fifteenfold, Varr. R. R. 1, 44, 1; so,

cum octavo, cum decimo,

Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 47, § 112:

cum centesimo,

Plin. 18, 10, 21, § 95; cf. with a subst.:

cum centesimā fruge agricolis faenus reddente terrā,

id. 5, 4, 3, § 24.—

With a means or instrument, considered as attending or accompanying the actor in his action (so most freq. anteclass., or in the poets and scientific writers): acribus inter se cum armis confligere, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 261, 6: effundit voces proprio cum pectore, Enn. ap. Serv. ad Verg. G. 2, 424: cum voce maximā conclamat, Claud. Quadrig. ap. Gell. 9, 13, 10:

cum linguā lingere,

Cat. 98, 3:

cum suo gurgite accepit venientem (fluvius),

Verg. A. 9, 816:

cum vino et oleo ungere,

Veg. 1, 11, 8 et saep.:

terra in Augurum libris scripta cum R uno,

Varr. L. L. 5, § 21 Müll.

In partic.

Completing the meaning of verbs.

With verbs of union, connection, and agreement: cum veteribus copiis se conjungere, Caes. B. G. 1, 37:

ut proprie cohaereat cum narratione,

Auct. Her. 1, 7, 11:

(haec) arbitror mihi constare cum ceteris scriptoribus,

id. 1, 9, 16:

interfectam esse... convenit mihi cum adversariis,

id. 1, 10, 17; cf. Cic. Inv. 1, 22, 31:

quī autem poterat in gratiam redire cum Oppianico Cluentius?

id. Clu. 31, 86:

hanc sententiam cum virtute congruere semper,

id. Off. 3, 3, 13:

foedera quibus etiam cum hoste devincitur fides,

id. ib. 3, 31, 111:

capita nominis Latini stare ac sentire cum rege videbant,

Liv. 1, 52, 4:

cum aliquo in gratiam redire,

id. 3, 58, 4:

stabat cum eo senatūs majestas,

id. 8, 34, 1:

conjurasse cum Pausaniā,

Curt. 7, 1, 6:

Autronium secum facere,

Cic. Sull. 13, 36; cf. also conecto, colligo, consentio, compono, etc.—

Of companionship, association, sharing, etc.:

cum his me oblecto, qui res gestas aut orationes scripserunt suas,

Cic. de Or. 2, 14, 61:

quoniam vivitur, non cum perfectis hominibus, sed cum iis, etc.,

id. Off. 1, 15, 46:

nulla (societas) carior quam ea quae cum re publicā est unicuique nostrum,

id. ib. 1, 17, 51:

cum civibus vivere,

id. ib. 1, 34, 124:

cum M. Fabio mihi summus usus est,

id. Fam. 9, 25, 2; cf.:

cum quibus publice privatimque hospitia amicitiasque junxerant,

Liv. 1, 45, 2:

partiri cum Dinaeā matre jussit,

Cic. Clu. 7, 21:

cum Baebio communicare,

id. ib. 16, 47; cf.

of local association, nearness: cum mortuā jugulatum servum nudum positurum ait,

Liv. 1, 58, 4:

duos tamen pudor cum eo tenuit,

id. 2, 10, 5.—

Of intercourse, traffic, etc.:

cum aliquo agere,

to deal with, Cic. Ac. 2, 35, 112; Caes. B. G. 1, 13:

cum eo Accius injuriarum agit,

Auct. Her. 1, 14, 24:

si par est agere cum civibus,

Cic. Off. 2, 23, 83; 3, 22, 88; id. Scaur. 10, 20; cf. id. Fam. 5, 18, 1; Liv. 1, 19, 7; 3, 9, 13; 4, 15, 2; Val. Max. 4, 3, 8:

si mihi cum Peripateticis res esset,

Cic. Ac. 2, 35, 112:

tecum enim mihi res est,

id. Rosc. Am. 30, 84:

uni tibi et cum singulis res est,

Liv. 2, 12, 11:

pacem cum Sabinis facere,

Cic. Off. 3, 30, 109.—Esp.: agere cum aliquo, to have a lawsuit with, Gai Inst. 4, 87; 4, 114 et saep.; v. ago, II. B. 8. a., and II. B. 9.; consisto, I. B. 5.; cf. also pango, etc.—

Of deliberation and discussion:

haec ego cum ipsis philosophis disserebam,

Cic. de Or. 1, 13, 57:

tempus cum conjuratis consultando absumunt,

Liv. 2, 4, 3 et saep.; v. also cogito, reputo, dubito, etc.—

Of strife, difference, etc.:

quibuscum continenter bellum gerunt,

Caes. B. G. 1, 1:

cum Cleanthe quam multis rebus Chrysippus dissidet!

Cic. Ac. 2, 47, 143:

neque tam quererer cum deo quod, etc.,

id. ib. 2, 25, 81:

cum quo Antiochum saepe disputantem audiebam,

id. ib. 2, 4, 11:

cum stomacheretur cum Metello,

id. Or. 2, 66, 267:

manu cum hoste confligere,

id. Off. 1, 23, 81:

utilia cum honestis pugnare,

id. ib. 3, 7, 34: cum Catone dissentire. id. ib. 3, 22, 88:

cum majoribus nostris bella gessit,

id. Scaur. 19, 45; Liv. 1, 35, 7; 7, 22, 4:

cum Auruncis bellum inire,

id. 2, 16, 8; cf.:

cum Volscis aequo Marte discessum est,

id. 2, 40, 14:

inimicitias cum Africano gerere,

Val. Max. 4, 1, 8; Sen. Vit. Beat. 2, 3:

cum Scipione dissentire,

Val. Max. 4, 1, 12:

cum utrāque (uxore) divortium fecit,

Suet. Claud. 26; cf. also certo, pugno, discrepo, differo, distraho, dissentio, etc.—

Of comparison:

nec Arcesilae calumnia conferenda est cum Democriti verecundiā,

Cic. Ac. 2, 5, 14:

hanc rationem dicendi cum imperatoris laude comparare,

id. de Or. 1, 2, 8:

conferam Sullamne cum Junio,

id. Clu. 34, 94:

(orationem) cum magnitudine utilitatis comparare,

id. Off. 2, 6, 20.—

Pregn., implying the notion of being furnished, endowed, clothed with any thing, or of possessing, holding, suffering under, etc., in a lit. and trop. sense: ille vir haud magnā cum re sed plenus fidei, Enn. ap. Cic. Sen. 1, 1 (cf. the antith.:

hominem sine re, sine fide,

Cic. Cael. 32, 78):

a portu illuc nunc cum laternā advenit,

Plaut. Am. prol. 149:

cadus cum vino,

id. Stich. 5, 1, 7; cf. id. Pers. 2, 3, 15:

olla cum aquā,

Cato, R. R. 156:

arcula cum ornamentis,

Plaut. Most. 1, 3, 91:

fiscos cum pecuniā Siciliensi,

Cic. Verr. 1, 8, 22:

onerariae naves cum commeatu,

Liv. 30, 24, 5 et saep.:

cum servili schemā,

Plaut. Am. prol. 117;

so of clothing,

id. Rud. 1, 4, 31; Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 24, § 54; 2, 5, 13, § 31; [p. 490] id. Rab. Post. 10, 27; Liv. 35, 34, 7; Suet. Claud. 13; Sil. 1, 94 et saep.:

ut ne quis cum telo servus esset,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 3, § 7;

so of weapons,

id. Phil. 2, 8, 19; cf.:

inmissi cum falcibus, etc.,

id. Tusc. 5, 23, 65:

vidi argenteum Cupidinem cum lampade,

holding, id. Verr. 2, 2, 47, § 115:

simulacrum Cereris cum faucibus,

id. ib. 2, 4, 49, §

109: cum elephanti capite puer natus,

Liv. 27, 11, 5; cf.:

cum quinque pedibus natus,

id. 30, 2, 10; 33, 1, 11; 27, 4, 14 al.: omnia cum pulchris animis Romana juventus, Enn. ap. Don. ad Ter. Phorm. 3, 1, 1; cf.

Ter. ib.: Minucius cum vulnere gravi relatus in castra,

Liv. 9, 44, 14:

te Romam venisse cum febri,

Cic. Att. 6, 9, 1; so id. de Or. 3, 2, 6; id. Clu. 62, 175: cum eisdem suis vitiis nobilissimus, with all his faults, i. e. in spite of, id. ib. 40, 112:

ex eis qui cum imperio sint,

id. Fam. 1, 1, 3 Manut.; cf.:

cum imperio aut magistratu,

Suet. Tib. 12 Bremi; v. imperium.—

With idem (never of the identity of two subjects, but freq. of the relation of two subjects to the same object, etc.;

v. Krebs, Antibarb. p. 538): tibi mecum in eodem est pistrino vivendum,

Cic. de Or. 2, 33, 144:

quandoque tu... omnibus in eisdem flagitiis mecum versatus es,

id. Verr. 2, 3, 80, § 187:

Numidae... in eādem mecum Africā geniti,

Liv. 30, 12, 15; 28, 28, 14; Tac. A. 15, 2; Val. Max. 6, 5, 3.—

In the adverb. phrase, cum primis, with the foremost, i.e. especially, particularly (rare), Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 28, § 68; id. Brut. 62, 224.—Post-class. also as one word: cumprīmis, Gell. 1, 12, 7 al.

Cum in anastrophe. So always with the pers. pron.: mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, etc.; cf. Cic. Or. 45, 154; Prisc. pp. 949 and 988 P.; and in gen. with the rel. pron.:

quocum (quīcum), quacum, quibuscum, quīcum (for quocum),

Cic. Or. 45, 154; Liv. 38, 9, 2; Cic. Att. 5, 1, 4; id. Verr. 2, 2, 31, §§ 76 and 77; Caes. B. G. 1, 8; Cic. Rep. 1, 10, 15; id. Att. 4, 9, 2; id. Off. 1, 35, 126; Quint. 8, 6, 65; 10, 5, 7; 11, 2, 38. But where cum is emphatic, or a demonstrative pron. is understood, cum is placed before the rel.; cf.:

his de rebus velim cum Pompeio, cum Camillo, cum quibus vobis videbitur, consideretis,

Cic. Fam. 14, 14, 3:

adhibuit sibi quindecim principes cum quibus causas cognovit,

id. Off. 2, 23, 82; Liv. 1, 45, 2.—

Before et... et, connecting two substt.:

cum et diurno et nocturno metu,

Cic. Tusc. 5, 23, 66.

In compounds the primitive form com was alone in use, and was unchanged before b, p, m: comburo, compono, committo, and a few words beginning with vowels: comes, comitium, and comitor; m was assimilated before r: corripio; often before l: colligo or conligo; rarely before n, as connumero, but usually dropped: conecto, conitor, conubium; with the change of m into n before all the remaining consonants: concutio, condono, confero, congero, conqueror, consumo, contero, convinco; so, conjicio, etc., but more usually conicio; and with the rejection of m before vowels and before h: coarguo, coëo, coinquino, coopto, cohibeo.—

It designates,

A being or bringing together of several objects: coëo, colloquor, convivor, etc.: colligo, compono, condo, etc.—

The completeness, perfecting of any act, and thus gives intensity to the signif. of the simple word, as in commaculo, commendo, concito, etc., comminuo, concerpo, concido, convello, etc.

Cum (ante-class. quom; freq. in MSS. of Cicero; the post-class. form quum is incorrectly given in many MSS. and edd.), conj. [pronom. stem ka- or kva- with acc. case ending].

Of time, when, as, while, sometimes = after, since.

In adverbial clauses dependent on non-preterite predicates.

The time designated by cum being indefinite, when, if, whenever, always with indic., except in the instances A. 2.

Cum with pres. indic., often equivalent to si.

With principal predicate in pres.:

nam omnes id faciunt quom se amari intellegunt,

Plaut. Truc. prol. 17:

facile, quom valemus, recta consilia aegrotis damus,

Ter. And. 2, 1, 9; Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 44; id. Poen. 4, 2, 20; id. Truc. 1, 1, 46; Ter. Phorm. 2, 1, 11:

cum semen maturum habet, tum tempestiva est,

Cato, R. R. 17; 41: quid? tum cum es iratus, permittis illi iracundiae dominationem animi tui? Cic. Rep. 1, 38, 59:

cum permagna praemia sunt, est causa peccandi,

id. Off. 3, 20, 79; id. de Or. 3, 23, 87:

quidam vivere tunc incipiunt cum desinendum est,

Sen. Ep. 23, 11.—

With principal predicate in fut. (rare):

ad cujus igitur fidem confugiet cum per ejus fidem laeditur cui se commiserit?

Cic. Rosc. Am. 40, 116; id. Leg. 3, 10, 24; id. Fl. 17, 40; Verg. A. 12, 208.—

With principal predicate in logical perf. (mostly poet.):

haud invito ad auris sermo mi accessit tuos, Quom te postputasse omnis res prae parente intellego,

Ter. Hec. 3, 5, 33:

qui cum levati morbo videntur, in eum de integro inciderunt,

Cic. Fam. 12, 30, 2:

(dolor) Cum furit... Profuit incensos aestus avertere ( = prodest),

Verg. G. 3, 457:

nemo non, cum alteri prodest, sibi profuit,

Sen. Ep. 81, 19; Cic. Att. 4, 18, 1; Liv. 8, 8, 11; Verg. A. 9, 435; id. G. 1, 288.—

With logical perf. indic.

With principal predicate in pres. (very freq.), the perf. translated either by English pres. perf. or by pres.: omnia sunt incerta cum a jure discessum est, when we ( once) disregard the law, Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 1:

gubernatores cum exultantes loligines viderunt... tempestatem significari putant,

id. Div. 2, 70, 145:

cum depulsi sunt agni a matribus, diligentia adhibenda est ne, etc.,

Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17:

cum ejus generis copia defecit, ad innocentium supplicia descendunt,

Caes. B. G. 6, 16, 5:

(hostis) cum intravit... modum a captivis non accipit,

Sen. Ira, 1, 8, 2:

quia enim, cum prima cognovi, jungere extrema cupio,

Plin. Ep. 7, 10, 1; Cic. Or. 1, 33, 153; id. Div. 2, 26, 56; id. Brut. 24, 93; id. Cat. 4, 6, 12; id. Fam. 6, 3, 3; Auct. Her. 4, 50, 63; Caes. B. G. 4, 33; 5, 21; Liv. 22, 9, 8; 34, 31, 4; Val. Max. 8, 10 prooem.; 9, 6 init.; Sen. Ep. 3, 2; 21, 9; id. Cons. Helv. 13, 2; Curt. 3, 3, 18; Plin. 18, 7, 10, § 60; Quint. 4, 2, 122; 10, 7, 14.—In oblique clauses the perf. indic. may remain, or may be changed into perf. subj., even after preterites, Cic. Off. 1, 28, 26; 2, 20, 69.—

With principal predicate in fut. ( poet.), Ov. P. 1, 5, 47.—

With two logical perff. (rare):

cum id factum est, tamen grex dominum non mutavit,

Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 6:

quae cum se disposuit... summum bonum tetigit,

Sen. Vit. Beat. 8, 5; id. Tranq. 17, 11; id. Ben. 1, 1, 5. —

With fut.

With principal predicate in fut.:

ita fere officia reperientur, cum quaeretur, quid deceat, etc.,

Cic. Off. 1, 34, 125; Auct. Her. 2, 7, 10; 2, 12, 17.— So with principal predicate in fut. imper:

etiam tum cum verisimile erit aliquem commisisse... latratote,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 20, 57, id. Mur. 31, 65; id. Att. 3, 8, 4; Liv. 35, 19, 6.—

With principal predicate in pres.:

in talibus... stabilitas amicitiae confirmari potest, cum homines cupiditatibus imperabunt,

Cic. Lael. 22, 82; Val. Max. 4, 8 prooem.—

With fut. perf.

With principal predicate in pres.:

quam (spem), cum in otium venerimus, habere volumus,

Cic. Att. 1, 7:

nec irascimur illis cum sessorem recusaverint,

Sen. Const. 12, 3; id. Cons. Marc. 7, 2.—

With principal predicate in fut. indic.:

cum haec erunt considerata, statim nostrae legis expositione... utemur,

Auct. Her. 2, 10, 15:

cum viderit secari patrem suum filiumve, vir bonus non flebit?

Sen. Ira, 1, 12, 1.—In oblique clauses, dependent on preterites, it is changed to the pluperf. subj.:

qui tum demum beatum terrarum orbem futurum praedicavit cum aut sapientes regnare, aut reges sapere coepissent,

Val. Max. 7, 2, ext. 4.—

With principal predicate in fut. imper.:

cum tempestates pluviae fuerint, videtote quot dies, etc.,

Cato, R. R. 2, 3; 25 init.; 38.—

With two fut. perff.:

cum bene cesserit negotiatio, multum militia retulerit,

Sen. Cons. Helv. 10, 6.—

In partic.

In definitions with pres, indic.:

humile genus est (causae) cum contempta res adfertur,

Auct. Her. 1, 3, 5:

purgatio est cum factum conceditur, culpa removetur,

Cic. Inv. 1, 11, 15: maxima est capitis deminutio cum aliquis simul et civitatem et libertatem amittit, Gai Inst. 1, 160; Auct. Her. 1, 46; 2, 4, 6; 4, 12, 17; 4, 53, 66 et saep. —

Etiam cum (less freq. cum etiam), even when (nearly = etiamsi), always with indic. if dependent on other than preterite predicates. (1) With pres.: qui cavet ne decipiatur, vix cavet, quom etiam cavet, Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 5:

in quo scelere, etiam cum multae causae convenisse... videntur, tamen non temere creditur,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 22, 62:

qui incolunt maritimas urbis, etiam cum manent corpore, animo tamen excursant,

id. Rep. 2, 4, 7; Curt. 6, 3, 10; Plin. Ep. 1, 8, 6.—(2) With fut.:

etiam cum potentes nocere intendent,

Sen. Const. 4, 1. —(3) With fut. perf.:

cum etiam plus contenderimus, etc.,

Cic. Fam. 1, 8, 7; Sen. Ben. 4, 13, 3.—(4) In oblique clauses with imperf. subj., Cic. Fragm. Tog. Cand. 15.—

Anteclass. with indic. in addressing indefinite persons in rules, after imper.:

sorba in sapa cum vis condere, arida facias,

Cato, R. R. 7 fin. — Always with indic. if a certain person is addressed; cf. Cic. Rep. 1, 38, 59 (l. A. 1. a. a supra); id. Verr. 2, 1, 18, § 47.—

With subj. referring to indefinite time.

With the 2d pers. sing., used in an indefinite sense ( you = one, any one).

With pres. subj.:

acerbum'st pro benefactis quom mali messim metas,

Plaut. Ep. 5, 2, 53:

quom faciem videas, videtur esse quantivis preti,

Ter. And. 5, 2, 15; Plaut. Cas. 3, 2, 32; id. Bacch. 3, 3, 38; id. Merc. 3, 2, 7 and 8 et saep.:

difficile est tacere cum doleas,

Cic. Sull. 10, 31:

etiam interpretatio nominis habet acumen cum ad ridiculum convertas,

id. de Or. 2, 63, 257; 2, 64, 259; 2, 67, 269; 2, 75, 305; 3, 38, 156; Sen. Ep. 75, 4 et saep.—

With perf. subj.:

difficile est cum praestare omnibus concupieris, servare aequitatem,

Cic. Off. 1, 19, 64:

quos (versus) cum cantu spoliaveris, nuda paene remanet oratio,

id. Or. 55, 183; id. Lael. 21, 77; id. Inv. 1, 47, 88; Sall. C. 12, 3; 51, 24; 58, 16.—

In the jurists, in a clause exemplifying a general rule: cum ergo ita scriptum sit Heres Titius esto, addicere debemus, Gai Inst. 2, 165; so id. ib. 4, 97; 3, 161; Auct. Her. 4, 31, 42.—

In the phrase audio cum dicat (I. F. 1, b. infra):

saepe soleo audire Roscium cum ita dicat se, etc.,

Cic. de Or. 2, 28, 129.—

When, after cum, an imperfect or pluperfect is used as a logical tense (post-Aug.): non tulit gratis qui cum rogasset accepit, who has asked for the favor, and, etc., Sen. Ben. 2, 1, 4; 2, 3, 1; 2, 13, 2; id. Ep. 86, 8.—

If the principal predicate is a potential subjunctive, an indefinite clause with a present or future after cum is always in the same mood:

caveto quom ventus siet aut imber, effodias aut seras,

Cato, R. R. 28:

quis tam dissoluto animo est qui, haec cum videat, tacere ac neglegere possit?

Cic. Rosc. Am. 11, 32; id. Planc. 39, 94; id. Clu. 55, 153; id. Inv. 1, 4, 87; 1, 51, 95; Auct. Her. 4, 6, 9; 4, 32, 43.—

Of definite time, always with indic. (for exceptions, v. 4. infra), when, if, while (for the distinction between cum and si, cf.:

formam mihi totius rei publicae, si jam es Romae, aut cum eris, velim mittas,

Cic. Att. 6, 3, 4:

quae si prodierit, atque adeo cum prodierit—scio enim proditurum esse—audiet,

id. Rosc. Am. 25, 100:

si damnatus eris, atque adeo cum damnatus eris—nam dubitatio quae poterit esse? etc.,

id. Verr. 2, 3, 29, § 70; id. Or. 2, 75, 304; Sen. Ep. 83, 10).

Cum with pres. indic.

Principal predicate in pres.:

certe, edepol, quom illum contemplo et formam cognosco meam... nimis simili'st mei,

Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 288; so id. Poen. 1, 2, 71; id. Pers. 4, 4, 15; Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 45: Py. Ne fle. Ph. Non queo Quom te video, Plaut. Mil. 4, 8, 14; id. Am. 1, 1, 260; id. Rud. 3, 4, 38:

potestne tibi ulla spes salutis ostendi cum recordaris in deos immortalis quam impius... fueris?

Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 18, § 47: cum hoc vereor, et cupio tibi... parcere, rursus immuto voluntatem meam ( = while), id. Rosc. Am. 34, 95; Serv. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 4:

equidem cum... recordor, vix aetatem Alexandri suffecturam fuisse reor ad unum bellum,

Liv. 9, 19, 12; Cic. Planc. 12, 29; id. Clu. 10, 29; Liv. 40, 46, 3:

quod cum ita est,

if this is so, Quint. 24, 58 (cf.:

quodsi ita est,

Cic. Mur. 2, 5); so,

often, nunc cum: qui modo nusquam conparebas, nunc quom conpares, peris,

Plaut. Aul. 4, 4, 2; so id. ib. 1, 3, 35; 2, 2, 17; id. As. 1, 2, 18; Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 39:

nos de injusto rege nihil loquimur, nunc cum de ipsa regali re publica quaerimus,

Cic. Rep. 3, 35, 47; Liv. 44, 39, 7.—So with logical perf. for the pres., Quint. 4, 2, 122.—But Cicero always uses nunc cum with a subj. when the clause, while designating present time, generally [p. 491] in opposition to a former time, implies a reason for the principal action, now that:

quodsi tum, cum res publica severitatem desiderabat, vici naturam, etc., nunc cum omnes me causae ad misericordiam... vocent, quanto tandem studio, etc.,

Cic. Mur. 2, 3, 6; id. Fam. 9, 16, 7; id. Font. 15, 35 (25); id. Imp. Pomp. 10, 27; 17, 50; not found in later writers, except in the Gallic panegyrists, e. g. Eum. Grat. Act. 2 init. —

With principal predicate in the logical perf., if (ante-class.):

Curculio hercle verba mihi dedit quom cogito,

Plaut. Curc. 4, 4, 27:

sed tandem, quom recogito, qui potis est scire, haec scire me?

id. Stich. 2, 1, 29; id. Mil. 4, 8, 64.—

Cum with logical perf. indic.

Principal predicate in pres.:

ergo quom optume fecisti, nunc adest occasio Benefacta cumulare,

after doing excellently, Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 63: quo etiam major vir habendus est (Numa), cum illam sapientiam constituendae civitatis duobus prope saeculis ante cognovit, quam, etc. ( = siquidem, if he has; seeing that he has), Cic. de Or. 2, 37, 154; Verg. A. 9, 249.—

With principal predicate in fut. ( poet.):

at cumst imposta corona, Clamabis capiti vina subisse meo (est imposta = erit imposta),

Prop. 4 (5), 2, 30.—

With fut.

With principal predicate in fut.:

quom videbis tum scies,

Plaut. Bacch. 1, 2, 37; id. Am. 3, 3, 15; id. Men. 5, 7, 7; Ter. Phorm. 1, 2, 82; id. Heaut. prol. 33:

sed cum certum sciam faciam te paulo ante certiorem,

Cic. Fam. 9, 23; 3, 11, 3; 12, 30, 5; 14, 3, 4; id. Q. Fr. 3, 8, 2; Liv. 3, 53, 10.—

With principal predicate in fut. perf.:

cum tu haec leges, ego jam annuum munus confecero,

Cic. Fam. 2, 12, 1.—

With principal predicate in imper. fut.:

mox quom imitabor Sauream, caveto ne succenseas,

Plaut. As. 2, 2, 105; id. Mil. 3, 3, 59.—

With principal predicate in subj. (potential):

cum testes ex Sicilia dabo, quem volet ille eligat,

Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 22, § 48; id. Off. 1, 34, 122; 3, 10, 46; id. Att. 4, 9, 1; 4, 10, 2; 4, 17, 1 et saep.—

In oblique clauses, after preterites, changed into imperf. subj., Caes. B. C. 2, 40; after other tenses it is either changed into pres. subj. or remains unchanged, Cic. Fam. 1, 56, 2; 1, 7, 4; Sall. C. 58, 8.—

With fut. perf.

With principal predicate in fut.:

mox dabo quom ab re divina rediero,

Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 193; id. Am. 1, 1, 43; 1, 2, 4; Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 8:

cum haec docuero, tum illud ostendam, etc.,

Cic. Clu. 4, 9; id. Verr. 2, 1, 1, § 3; id. de Or. 2, 33, 143; 2, 59, 239; id. Att. 3, 23, 5 et saep.—In oblique clauses, after preterites, the fut. perf. is changed into pluperf. subj., Cic. Rosc. Am. 10, 28; 28, 78; Liv. 1, 56, 11; 5, 30, 1; after other tenses, and often in oblique oration, it remains unchanged, or is changed into perf. subj., Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 71, § 183; id. Fam. 2, 5, 2 dub.; Liv. 21, 13, 8; 3, 56, 10.—

With principal predicate in imper. (almost always fut. imper.):

quod quom dixero, si placuerit, Facitote,

Ter. Eun. 5, 8, 37:

cum ego Granium testem produxero, refellito, si poteris,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 59, § 154; id. Marcell. 9, 27; id. Fam. 16, 4, 3; Tac. A. 1, 22.—With pres. imper., Liv. 24, 38, 7.—

With principal predicate in subj. (potential):

quae cum omnia collegeris, tum ipse velim judices satisne videatur,

Cic. Fam. 5, 2, 4; id. Or. 13, 41 dub.—In oblique clauses, after non-preterites, the fut. perf. remains unchanged:

oro, ne me hodie, cum isti respondero, putetis, etc.,

Cic. Phil. 2, 5, 10; id. Clu. 2, 6.—

With subj. in definite time.

Sometimes in oblique construction (3. c. e; 3. d. a).—

Sometimes by attraction:

curata fac sint quom a foro redeam domum,

Plaut. Aul. 2, 3, 6; 2, 3, 11; id. Stich. 1, 2, 8; id. Curc. 2, 2, 3:

non admirere cum ego ipse me id ex te primum audisse confitear?

Cic. Planc. 24, 58. —

In the semi-causal connection nunc cum, v. 3, a. a fin. supra.

In adverbial anterior clauses dependent on preterite predicates, the time of the cum clause preceding that of the principal sentence (always with subj., except in the instances mentioned 2.; 3. a; and 5.), when, after.

With pluperf. subj. (so generally): quom socios nostros mandisset impius Cyclops, Liv. And. Fragm. ap. Prisc. 8, p. 817 (Lubbert conjectures, without sufficient reason, mandit sex): quom saucius multifariam ibi factus esset, tamen volnus capiti nullum evenit, Cato, Orig. ap. Gell. 3, 7, 19:

portisculus signum cum dare coepisset,

Enn. Ann. v. 234 Vahl.:

quom testamento patris partisset bona,

Afran. Com. Rel. v. 50 Rib.: quem quom ibi vidissent Hortensius Postumiusque, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 4, 32; Enn. Ann. v. 241 Vahl.; Turp. Com. Rel. v. 48 Rib.; Lucil. ap. Non. p. 394, 27 (the MSS. reading:

quom venisset,

Plaut. As. 2, 3, 15, is corrupt):

audivi summos homines cum quaestor ex Macedonia venissem Athenas,

Cic. de Or. 1, 11, 45:

haec cum Crassus dixisset, silentium est consecutum,

id. ib. 1, 35, 160:

cum Thebani Lacedaemonios bello superavissent... aeneum statuerunt tropaeum,

id. Inv. 2, 23, 69:

Dionysius cum fanum Proserpinae Locris expilavisset, navigabat Syracusas,

id. N. D. 3, 34, 83:

eo cum venisset, animadvertit ad alteram ripam magnas esse copias hostium,

Caes. B. G. 5, 18:

Tarquinius et Tullia minor... cum domos vacuas novo matrimonio fecissent, junguntur nuptiis,

Liv. 1, 46, 9 et saep. —

With pluperf. indic.

Ante-class. in place of the class. subj.:

idem me pridem quom ei advorsum veneram, Facere atriensem voluerat,

Plaut. Cas. 2, 8, 28:

Quid ais? Quom intellexeras, id consilium capere, quor non dixti extemplo,

Ter. And. 3, 2, 38.—

If the pluperfect is a virtual imperfect, designating the time at which the main action took place, the principal predicate being likewise in the pluperfect, when the clause would require an indicative if placed in the imperfect (3. a. a): exspectationem nobis non parvam adtuleras cum scripseras Varronem tibi confirmasse, etc. ( = exspectabam cum legebam; cf. C. 3, a. a, 2.), Cic. Att. 3, 18, 1; cf. Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 9, 2, where the cum clause is relative; v. E.: Romae haud minus terroris... erat quam fuerat biennio ante cum castra Punica objecta Romanis moenibus fuerant (C. 3. a. a, 1.), Liv. 27, 44, 1; so id. 5, 28, 1; 26, 40, 17; 44, 10, 1.—

If the clause indicates that the time of the main action is a period, subsequent to that of the action designated by the pluperfect:

nam tum cum in Asia res magnas permulti amiserant, scimus Romae, solutione impedita, fidem concidisse,

Cic. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19:

cum ea consecutus nondum eram... tamen ista vestra nomina numquam sum admiratus,

id. Fam. 3, 7, 5; id. Verr. 2, 5, 69, § 178; id. Inv. 2, 42, 124; Caes. B. G. 7, 35; Liv. 24, 7, 1 sq.; Nep. Dat. 6, 5; Curt. 9, 10, 12; Verg. A. 5, 42.—

If both predicates denote repeated action, the anterior clause with cum has the pluperf. indic. or subj.

With pluperf. indic.

With principal predicate in imperf. indic. (so almost always in Cicero and Caesar; not in the poets, nor in Vell., Val. Max., Tac., Suet., or Plin.), whenever:

cum ad aliquod oppidum venerat, eadem lectica usque ad cubiculum deferebatur,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 11, § 27; 2, 1, 46, § 120; 2, 3, 67, § 156; 2, 4, 61, § 137; 2, 5, 10, § 27; id. Fl. 7, 16; 10, 21; id. Agr. 2, 26, 68; id. Or. 32, 113; id. Brut. 24, 93:

(Cassi vellaunus) cum equitatus noster se in agros ejecerat, essedarios ex silvis emittebat,

Caes. B. G. 5, 19; 3, 14; 3, 15; 4, 7; 5, 35; 7, 22; id. B. C. 1, 58; Sall. J. 92, 8; 44, 4:

cum comminus venerant, gladiis a velitibus trucidabantur,

Liv. 38, 21, 12; Nep. Epam. 3, 6; Sen. Ep. 11, 4; Curt. 3, 10, 8; 3, 10, 11; Quint. 7, 1, 4; Gell. 15, 22, 5; 17, 18, 3; Gai Inst. 4, 15; Pacat. 9.—

With principal predicate in perf. indic.:

Pacuvius qui Syriam usu suam fecit, cum vino... sibi parentaverat,

Sen. Ep. 12, 8; 108, 14.—

With pluperf. subj., an imperf. indic. in principal sentence:

cum fossam latam cubiculari lecto circumdedisset, ejusque transitum... conjunxisset, eum ipse detorquebat,

Cic. Tusc. 5, 20, 59; id. Verr. 2, 3, 41, § 94:

cum cohortes ex acie procucurrissent, Numidae... effugiebant, etc.,

Caes. B. C. 2, 41:

cum in jus duci debitorem vidissent, undique convolabant,

Liv. 2, 27, 8; 25, 3, 11; 5, 48, 2.—

In anterior clauses with imperf. subj.

When the principal clause expresses an immediate consequence ( = pluperf. subj.):

Demaratus cum audiret dominationem Cypseli confirmari, defugit patriam ( = cum audivisset),

Cic. Rep. 2, 19, 34; Caes. B. G. 5, 17 et saep.—

Where both verbs relate to one transaction, especially in remarks and replies:

(Epaminondas) cum gravi vulnere exanimari se videret, quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus, etc.,

Cic. Fin. 2, 30, 97:

cum ex eo quaereretur quid esset dolus magnus, respondebat, etc.,

id. Off. 3. 14, 60; id. Or. 2, 69, 278; id. Rosc. Am. 25, 70; Liv. 3, 71, 4 et saep.—

When the principal action takes place during the action of the dependent clause:

qui cum unum jam et alterum diem desideraretur, neque in eis locis inveniretur... liberti Asuvii in eum invadunt, etc.,

Cic. Clu. 13, 38.—

For the perf. indic. instead of pluperf. subj. v. C. 1. d. infra.

In adverbial clauses of coincident time dependent on preterites ( = eo tempore quo), the clause with cum designating the time at which or during which the main action took place, when, as, while.[The theory of the use of tenses and moods in these clauses is not fully settled. The older grammarians require the indicative if cum denotes pure time, but the subjunctive if denoting cause or relations similar to cause. Zumpt and others acknowledge that the rule is frequently not observed, attributing this to the predilection of the Latin language for the subjunctive. Recently Hoffmann (Zeitpartikeln der Lateinischen Sprache, 1st ed. 1860; 2d ed. 1873) and Lubbert (Syntax von Quom, 1870) have advanced the theory that cum requires the indicative if denoting absolute time, but the subjunctive if denoting relative time. They define absolute time as time co-ordinate or parallel with, or logically independent of, the time of the principal action, which performs the function of a chronological date for the principal action, and they consider it as a criterion that the clause might have constituted an independent sentence; while relative time is logically subordinate to the principal action. Hoffmann condenses his theory in the following words: cum with indicative names and describes the time at which the action of the principal sentence took place; cum with the subjunctive, on the contrary, designates the point of time at which, or the space of time during which, the action expressed in the principal sentence commenced or ended. The chief objections to this theory are: (1) Its vagueness.—(2) The facts that in many instances cum with the subjunctive clearly dates the main action (C. 3. a. b, 2, and 4.; C. 3. a. 5.; C. 3. b. b, 3. and 5.; C. 3. b. g infra); that many of the subjunctive clauses with cum may be transformed into independent sentences (C. 3. b. b, 2. and 3. infra); that many indicative clauses with cum are logically subordinate to the main action (C. 3. a. a, 2. infra), and that when both moods are used in two co-ordinated clauses with cum belonging to the same main sentence, Hoffmann must account for the difference of the moods by explanations not drawn from his theory (Cic. Agr. 2, 64, 64; id. Clu. 30, 83; id. Div. 1, 43, 97; id. Fin. 2, 19, 61; id. de Or. 67, 272; Caes. B. C. 2, 17; Liv. 6, 40, 17; 30, 44, 10).—(3) The impossibility of clearly drawing the line between logical co-ordination and subordination; and the fact that, wherever it is drawn, there will be many passages not accounted for (cf. 1. init. and many passages under C. 3. a. a, 3.; C. 3. a. d; C. 3. b. g, etc.).—(4) That the supposed use of cum with the imperfect indicative is inconsistent with the received doctrine that the imperfect always designates a time relative to another time—a difficulty not satisfactorily met by Hoffman's assumption of an aoristic imperfect.]GENERAL RULE.—The predicate after cum is in the perfect indicative (or historical present) if the action is conceived as a point of time coincident with the time of the main action. It is either in the imperfect indicative or in the imperfect subjunctive if the action is conceived as occupying a period of time within which the main action took place (e. g.:

quid enim meus frater ab arte adjuvari potuit, cum... furem se videre respondit? Quid in omni oratione Crassus... cum pro Cn. Plancio diceret?

Cic. de Or. 2, 54, 220;

where dicebat might stand for diceret, but not responderet for respondit: cum ad tribum Polliam ventum est, et praeco cunctaretur, etc.,

Liv. 29, 37, 8; cf.:

cum tecum Ephesi collocutus sum,

Cic. Fam. 13, 55, 1; and:

cum te Puteolis prosequerer,

id. ib. 3, 10, 8: cum primum lex coepta ferri est, Liv 3, 14, 4; and: cum [p. 492] ferretur lex, id. 5, 30, 4;

also,

Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 1, and Liv. 3, 58, 7).

Both predicates in the perf. indic. (or histor. pres.), both clauses denoting points of time (the principal predicate may be in any verbal form implying a perfect).

The clause expressing a momentary action:

posticulum hoc recepit quom aedis vendidit, Flaut. Trin. 1, 2, 157: scilicet qui dudum tecum venit cum pallam mihi Detulisti,

id. Men. 2, 3, 46; prol. 62; id. Poen. 4, 2, 82; id. Ep. 2, 2, 33; Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 57; id. Heaut. 2, 3, 21 et saep.:

non tum cum emisti fundum Tusculanum, in leporario apri fuerunt,

Varr. R. R. 3, 3, 8:

in judiciis quanta vis esset didicit cum est absolutus,

Cic. Tog. Cand. Fragm. 4:

per tuas statuas vero cum dixit, vehementer risimus,

id. de Or. 2, 59, 242:

cum occiditur Sex. Roscius, (servi) ibidem fuerunt,

id. Rosc. Am. 41, 120; id. Verr. 2, 2, 29, § 70; 1, 4, 11; 2, 2, 66, § 160; 2, 3, 47, § 112; id. Caecin. 29, 85; id. Sest. 55, 157; id. Phil. 2, 9, 21; id. Rep. 6, 22, 24; id. Fam. 9, 15, 2; id. Att. 2, 1, 5 et saep.:

tunc flesse decuit cum adempta sunt nobis arma,

Liv. 3, 55, 10; 10, 6, 8; 28, 42, 14; 42, 46, 1; Vitr. 2, 8, 12; 2, 1, 7; 2, 9, 15;

6, 7, 4: semel dumtaxat vultum mutavit, tunc cum... anulum in profundum dejecit,

Val. Max. 6, 9, 6; 8, 8, ext. 1; 9, 1, ext. 1;

9, 8, 1: rerum natura... cum visum est deinde, (filium tuum) repetiit,

Sen. Cons. Polyb. 10, 4; 11, 2; id. Q. N. 1, 11, 3; 6, 25, 4:

accepimus et serpentem latrasse cum pulsus est regno Tarquinius,

Plin. 8, 41, 63, § 153; 2, 24, 22, § 90; 2, 52, 53, § 139; Suet. Claud. 21; Hor. S. 2, 3, 61; Ov. Tr. 5, 11, 8; Tib. 3, 5, 18; Mart. 5, 49, 9.—So, cum primum, when first, the first time that, as soon as:

jube vinum dari: jam dudum factum'st quom primum bibi,

Plaut. As. 5, 2, 40; id. Cas. prol. 17; Ter. Hec. alt. prol. 31; id. And. prol. 1; id. Eun. 3, 3, 4:

Pompeius cum primum contionem habuit... ostendit, etc.,

Cic. Verr. 1, 15, 45; id. Fam. 2, 9, 1; Liv. 3, 55, 10; 25, 6, 2; 25, 29, 4; 31, 3, 1; 40, 8, 1; 42, 34, 3; Curt. 6, 11, 23; but with imperf. subj. when referring to a per. of time:

ipse cum primum pabuli copia esse inciperet, ad exercitum venit,

Caes. B. G. 2, 2.—In the poets and later writers, the imperf. subj. often occurs where classic prose has the perf. indic.:

effice ut idem status sit cum exigis qui fuit cum promitterem,

Sen. Ben. 4, 39, 4:

tum lacrimare debueras cum equo calcaria subderes,

Curt. 7, 2, 6; Suet. Claud. 6; Ov. P. 4, 12, 28.—

If the clause denotes a state, condition, or action of longer duration, it takes the perf. indic. if asserted as a complete fact without regard to what happened during its progress (virtual point of time):

in quem Juppiter se convertit cum exportavit per mare... Europen,

Varr. R. R. 2, 5, 5:

ne cum in Sicilia quidem (bellum) fuit... pars ejus belli in Italiam ulla pervasit,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6:

nempe eo (lituo) Romulus regiones direxit tum cum urbem condidit,

id. Div. 1, 17, 30; id. Verr. 2, 3, 54, § 125; id. Lig. 7, 20; id. Rep. 3, 32, 44:

non tibi, cum in conspectu Roma fuit, succurrit? etc.,

Liv. 2, 40, 7; 34, 3, 7; Nep. Iphicr. 2, 4; id. Pelop. 4, 3.—

With perf. indic., by the time when, before, referring to facts which actually occurred before the action of the principal sentence:

ab Anaximandro moniti Lacedaemonii sunt ut urbem... linquerent, quod terrae motus instaret, tum cum... urbs tota corruit,

Cic. Div. 1, 50, 112; Liv. 22, 36, 4; 34, 31, 15; Prop. 2, 32 (3, 30), 53.—

With perf. indic. when actions in immediate sequence are represented as coincident:

ad quem cum accessimus, Appio, subridens, Recipis nos, inquit, etc.,

Varr. R. R. 3, 2, 2:

me primus dolor percussit, Cotta cum est expulsus,

Cic. Brut. 89, 303:

itaque ne tum quidem cum classem perdidisti, Mamertinis navem imperare ausus es,

id. Verr. 2, 5, 23, § 59:

haec cum facta sunt in concilio, magna spe et laetitia omnium discessum est,

Caes. B. C. 3, 87:

cum Thessalos in armis esse nuntiatum est, Ap. Claudium... senatus misit,

Liv. 42, 5, 8:

Gracchus cum ex Sardinia rediit, orationem ad populum habuit,

Gell. 15, 12, 1; Cic. Imp. Pomp. 1, 2; id. Deiot. 6, 17; id. Top. 16, 61; id. Div. 1, 43, 98; id. Fam. 5, 21, 2; Liv. 4, 44, 10; 4, 60, 8; 9, 25, 2; 22, 14, 12; Nep. Dat. 11, 1; Suet. Caes. 31; Gell. 1, 23, 5; Prop. 3, 20, 37 (4, 21, 7).—Hence a perf. indic. in co-ordination with pluperf. subj.: cum sol nocte visus esset... et cum caelum discessisse visum est (decemviri ad libros ire jussi sunt), Cic. Div. 1, 43, 97.—

With a perf. indic. (or histor. pres.), the principal predicate in imperf.

The action falling within the time of the principal predicate:

set Stalagmus quojus erat tunc nationis, quom hinc abit?

Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 107; id. Rud. 3, 6, 9; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 51:

haec Crassi oratio cum edita est, quattuor et triginta tum habebat annos, etc.,

Cic. Brut. 43, 161:

eo cum venio, praetor quiescebat,

id. Verr. 2, 4, 14, § 32; 2, 5, 69, § 178; id. Fl. 13, 20; id. Pis. 1, 2; id. Lig. 1, 3; id. Phil. 2, 21, 52; 3, 4, 11; id. Fam. 13, 35, 2; id. Att. 6, 1, 13:

cum Caesari in Galliam venit, alterius factionis principes erant Aedui, alterius Sequani,

Caes. B. G. 6, 12; Sall. J. 71, 1:

cum haec accepta clades est, jam C. Horatius et T. Menenius consules erant,

Liv. 2, 51, 1; 21, 39, 4; 23, 49, 5; 28, 27, 14; 34, 16, 6;

45, 39, 1: merito me non adgnoscis, nam cum hoc factum est, integer eram,

Sen. Ben. 5, 24, 3.—Post-class. writers generally use imperf. subj.:

beneficium ei videberis dedisse cui tunc inimicissimus eras cum dares?

Sen. Ben. 5, 19, 7:

bona quoque, quae tunc habuit cum damnaretur, publicabuntur,

Dig. 28, 18, § 1:

pauper Fabricius (erat) Pyrrhi cum sperneret aurum,

Claud. IV. Cons. Hon. 413.—

The action strictly anterior to the principal sentence, rare (1. d.): nam quod conabar cum interventum'st dicere, nunc expedibo, Pac. ap. Non. p. 505, 3 (Trag. Rel. v. 65 Rib.):

cum est ad nos adlatum de temeritate eorum, etc., cetera mihi facillima videbantur... multaque mihi veniebant in mentem, etc.,

Cic. Fam. 3, 10, 1; Sall. C. 51, 32; Verg. A. 6, 515; id. E. 3, 14.—

The predicate after cum conceived as a period or space of time (including repeated action) is either in the imperf. indic. or imperf. subj. [In ante-classical writers and Cicero the imperf. indic. very frequent, and largely prevailing over the subj., except that when the principal predicate denotes a point of time (with perf.), Cicero commonly uses the subj.; the imperf. indic. occurs in Cicero 241 times; in Caesar once with the force of a relativeclause (B. G. 1, 40, 5), and 3 times of repeated action; in Nep. once of repeated action (Att. 9, 6); in Sall. twice (J. 31, 20; id. H. 1, 48, 6 Dietsch); in Liv. 22 times; in Verg. 4 times; in Ovid twice; in Tib. twice; in Prop. 3 times; in Val. Max. twice; then it disappears (except once each in Tac. and Mart.), but reappears in Gaius (3 times), Gellius (twice), and the Gallic panegyrists (several times)].

Both predicates denoting spaces of time, the principal predicate always in the imperf. indic. unless the mood is changed by other influences.

Cum with the imperf. indic. (1) In express or implied opposition to other periods of time, esp. with tum or tunc:

eademne erat haec disciplina tibi quom tu adulescens eras?

Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 17:

alium esse censes nunc me atque olim quom dabam?

Ter. And. 3, 3, 13; Plaut. Capt. 2, 1, 50; id. Most. 1, 3, 64; id. Mil. 2, 2, 26; Ter. And. 1, 1, 69; Enn. ap. Cic. Brut. 19, 76 (Ann. v. 222 Vahl.):

qui cum plures erant, paucis nobis exaequari non poterant, hi postquam pauciores sunt, etc.,

Auct. Her. 4, 18, 25:

qui (Pompeius) cum omnes Caesarem metuebamus ipse eum diligebat, postquam ille metuere coepit, etc.,

Cic. Att. 8, 1, 4:

res per eosdem creditores per quos cum tu aderas agebatur,

id. Fam. 1, 1, 1 (cf.:

Senatus consultum factum est de ambitu in Afranii sententiam quam ego dixeram cum tu adesses,

id. Q. Fr. 2, 9, 3):

Trebellium valde jam diligit: oderat tum cum ille tabulis novis adversabatur,

id. Phil. 6, 4, 11:

non tam id sentiebam cum fruebar, quam tunc cum carebam,

id. Red. Quir. 1, 3:

etenim tunc esset hoc animadvertendum cum classis Syracusis proficiebatur,

id. Verr. 2, 5, 43, § 111 (so 111 times in Cicero, including the instances where the principal predicate is in the perf.):

cum captivis redemptio negabatur, nos vulgo homines laudabant, nunc deteriore condicione sumus, etc.,

Liv. 25, 6, 14; 10, 7, 2; 33, 34, 3; 34, 4, 10; 44, 36, 8; 45, 38, 1; Ov. P. 2, 6, 9; id. M. 13, 473; Val. Max. 6, 3, 1; 4, 1, 10; Mart. 12, 70, 10; Gai Inst. 1, 184; Eum. Grat. Act. 6; cf.: cur eum, cum in consilium iretur, Cluentius et Canutius abesse patiebantur? Cur cum in consilium mittebant, Stajenum judicem qui pecuniam dederant, non requirebant? Cic. Clu. 30, 83 (cum iretur, of the time when the judges retired; cum mittebant, of the previous time, when the parties were asked about the closing of the case; opp. cum iretur).—Poets, even in the class. per., sometimes use the subj. in dependence upon the indic.:

hic subito quantus cum viveret esse solebat, Exit humo,

Ov. M. 13, 441. —(2) The principal predicate denoting a mental act or reflection occasioned by, or accompanying the action of the clause with cum (mostly ante-class. and in Cicero):

desipiebam mentis cum illa scripta mittebam tibi,

Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 35; id. Aul. 2, 2, 1; id. Ps. 1, 5, 86:

sed tu cum et tuos amicos in provinciam quasi in praedam invitabas, et cum eis praedabare, et... non statuebas tibi rationem esse reddendam?

Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 11, § 29:

illas res tantas cum gerebam, non mihi mors, non exsilium ob oculos versabatur?

id. Sest. 21, 47; id. Cat. 3, 1, 3; 3, 7, 16; id. Verr. 2, 2, 10, § 26; 2, 2, 13, § 33; 2, 2, 35, § 86; 2, 3, 86, § 198; 2, 5, 21, § 54; id. Fl. 1, 1; id. Deiot. 1, 3; 8, 23; id. Pis. 24, 56 and 57; id. Ac. 2, 28, 89; id. Or. 13, 41; id. Tusc. 2, 15, 43; id. Fam. 7, 9, 5 (22 times); Sall. H. 1, 48, 6 Dietsch (cf.:

num P. Decius cum se devoveret, et equo admisso in mediam aciem Latinorum inruebat, aliquid... cogitabat?

Cic. Fin. 2, 19, 61; cum se devoveret explains the circumstances of inruebat; hence acc. to 3. a. b, 2. in subj.; cf. Madv. ad loc., who reads devoverat).—(3) If the predicate after cum has a meaning peculiar to the imperf. indic., which by the use of the subj. would be effaced: quod erat os tuum, cum videbas eos homines, quorum ex bonis istum anulus aureus donabas? (descriptive imperf.) Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 80, § 187; so,

fulgentis gladios hostium videbant Decii, cum in aciem eorum inruebant,

id. Tusc. 2, 24, 59: cum de plebe consulem non accipiebat ( = accipere nolebat, conative imperf.), id. Brut. 14, 55:

cum vim quae esset in sensibus explicabamus, etc.,

id. Ac. 2, 12, 37 (the verbum dicendi refers to a certain stage in the discourse, for which Cicero uses the imperf. indic. in independent sentences, e. g. N. D. 3, 29, 71; 3, 6, 15; de Or. 1, 53, 230; 2, 19, 83; 2, 84, 341); so,

equidem... risum vix tenebam, cum Attico Lysiae Catonem nostrum comparabas,

id. Brut. 8, 293:

cum censebam,

id. de Or. 1, 62, 264:

cum dicebam,

id. Fam. 6, 1, 5:

cum ponebas,

id. Fin. 2, 19, 63; so esp. in Cicero's letters the phrase cum haec scribebam = while I am writing this, to preserve the meaning of an epistolary tense, referring to a state, condition, or action in progress at the time of writing the letter:

res, cum haec scribebam, erat in extremum adducta discrimen,

id. Fam. 12, 6, 2; 3, 12, 2; 5, 12, 2; 6, 4, 1; id. Att. 5, 20, 5 et saep.; cum haec scriberem, scripsissem, scripsi, are not epistolary tenses, but refer to events happening after the letter or part of it was finished, = when I wrote, had written, id. ib. 2, 15, 3; 10, 4, 7; 4, 10, 2; id. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 6, § 19; Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 6, 5; 8, 13, 2;

sometimes cum dabam = cum scribebam,

Cic. Fam. 12, 16, 3 (but cf.:

cum scriberem, as epistolary tense, in oblique discourse,

id. Att. 15, 13, 7).—(4) The coincidence in time of two actions is made emphatic, = eo ipso tempore quo:

tum cum insula Delos... nihil timebat, non modo provinciis sed etiam Appia via jam carebamus,

Cic. Imp. Pomp. 18, 55; id. Phil. 1, 15, 36; 13, 8, 17; id. Sull. 10, 31; id. Tusc. 2, 8, 20; id. Off. 3, 27, 100; id. Dom. 45, 118.—

The predicate after cum is in the imperf. subj. (1) To impart to the clause a causal, adversative or concessive meaning besides the temporal relation:

antea cum equester ordo judicaret, improbi magistratus in provinciis inserviebant publicanis (a logical consequence),

Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 41, § 94:

sed cum jam honores (Hortensii) et illa senior auctoritas gravius quiddam requireret, remanebat idem (dicendi genus) nec decebat idem,

id. Brut. 95, 327; id. Phil. 1, 1, 1; id. Rosc. Am. 15, 42; 16, 45; id. Pis. 10, 2; Liv. 25, 13, 1; 26, 5, 1.—(2) To indicate circumstances under which the main action took place, and by which it is explained:

Flaminius, cum tripudio auspicaretur, pullarius diem differebat, etc.,

Cic. Div. 1, 35, 77: [p. 493] equidem cum peterem magistratum, solebam in prensando dimittere a me Scaevolam, id. de Or. 1, 24, 112; id. Inv. 2, 17, 52; Liv. 41, 1, 2 (cf. 3. b. b, 3.).—(3) To describe the locality of the main action: quom essem in provincia legatus, quam plures ad praetores et consules vinum honorarium dabant, Cato ap. Isid. Orig. 20, 3, 8:

Zenonem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter,

Cic. N. D. 1, 21, 59; 1, 28, 79; id. Tusc. 2, 14, 34; id. Fam. 3, 8, 5; id. Att. 2, 11, 1; 12, 5, 4; 16, 14, 1; id. Verr. 2, 4, 12, § 29; Liv. 5, 54, 3 (cf. 3. b. b, 4.).—(4) To designate the time of the main action as a condition:

cum ageremus vitae supremum diem, scribebamus hoc,

Cic. Fin. 4, 27, 54:

cum jam in exitu annus esset, Q. Marcius... magistratu abiturus erat,

Liv. 39, 23, 1 (cf. 3. b. b, 5.).—

If both the clause with cum and the principal predicate denote repeated action, the predicate with cum in class. prose is in the imperf. indic. or subj. according to the rules under a and b; the principal predicate being always in the imperf. indic.; but in ante-class. writers cum has always the imperf. indic. (1) Imperf. indic.:

tum mi aedes quoque arridebant, quom ad te veniebam, tuae,

Plaut. As. 1, 3, 55; id. Am. 1, 1, 45; id. Rud. 4, 7, 25 sqq.; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 19; Cinc. de Re Mil. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 5; Asell. ap. Gell. 2, 13, 4; Cic. Att. 2, 7, 4; id. Verr. 2, 2, 13, § 34; Caes. B. C. 1, 79, 2; Gai Inst. 2, 101; Pacat. Pan. 9 fin.:

cum a nostro Catone laudabar vel reprehendi me a ceteris facile patiebar,

Cic. Or. 13, 41; so Nep. Att. 9, 6.—To distinguish from adversative relations, as Cic. Rosc. Com. 3, 9; id. Att. 12, 39, 2; id. de Or. 1, 14, 62; Caes. B. C. 3, 44, 6; Gai Inst. 2, 254.—If only the clause with cum, but not the principal predicate, denotes repeated action, the latter is in the perf., the former in imperf. indic., Caes. B. C. 2, 17; Cic. Arch. 5, 10.—(2) Imperf. subj., mostly denoting circumstances to explain the main action: cum dilectus antiquitus fieret... tribunus militaris adigebat, etc., Cinc. de Re Mil. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 2:

Hortensius cum partiretur tecum causas, prorogandi locum semper tibi relinquebat,

Cic. Brut. 51, 190; id. Div. 1, 45, 102; id. de Or. 1, 54, 232; id. Brut. 62, 222; Liv. 3, 66, 2; 5, 25, 12:

ex hoc effectos panes, cum in colloquiis Pompeiani famem nostris objectarent, vulgo in eos jaciebant (causal),

Caes. B. C. 3, 48; Cic. Fin. 2, 19, 62; so,

according to class. usage,

Sen. Ep. 86, 11; Curt. 5, 2, 7; 6, 5, 18; 7, 3, 13; Suet. Caes. 65;

contrary to class. usage,

Val. Max. 3, 6, 6; Sen. Ep. 30, 7; 77, 8; Tac. H. 2, 91; Spart. Had. 18. —

In other instances (which are rare), both moods occur, either without any discrimination, or for special reasons. (1) Ante-class.:

nam quom modo exibat foras, ad portum se aibat ire,

Plaut. Rud. 2, 2, 2. —(2) Class.:

ut, cum L. Opimii causam defendebat, C. Carbo nihil de Gracchi nece negabat, sed id jure factum esse dicebat,

Cic. de Or. 2, 25, 106 (cf.:

nuper cum ego C. Sergii Oratae... causam defenderem, nonne omnis nostra in jure versata defensio est?

id. ib. 1, 39, 178; in each of these sentences the clause with cum sustains exactly the same relation to the principal predicate; but the former has the imperf. in the principal sentence, and in this connection Cic. prefers the indic. after cum):

similiter arbitror... illum (oratorem) de toto illo genere non plus quaesiturum esse, quid dicat, quam Polycletum illum, cum Herculem fingebat, quem ad modum pellem aut hydram fingeret (fingebat, for euphony, in view of the foll. fingeret),

id. de Or. 2, 16, 70; cf.:

nec vero ille artifex cum faceret Jovis formam... contemplabatur aliquem, e quo similitudinem duceret,

id. Or. 2, 9.—Without assignable reason:

casu, cum legerem tuas litteras, Hirtius erat apud me,

Cic. Att. 15, 1, 2; cf.:

Hasdrubal tum forte cum haec gerebantur, apud Syphacem erat,

Liv. 29, 31, 1:

cum haec Romae agebantur, Chalcide Antiochus ipse sollicitabat civitatium animos, etc.,

id. 36, 5, 1; cf.:

cum haec in Hispania gererentur, comitiorum jam appetebat dies,

id. 35, 8, 1 (Weissenb. gerebantur):

cum haec agebantur, Chalcide erat Antiochus,

id. 36, 15, 1; cf.:

cum haec agerentur jam consul via Labicana ad fanum Quietis erat,

id. 4, 41, 8; 35, 2, 1.—(3) PostAug. writers almost always use imperf. subj., disregarding the class. usage: ipsa fruebatur arte cum pingeret (cf. a, 2.), Sen. Ep. 9, 7; id. Cons. Marc. 23, 3; Plin. Pan. 34:

tunc erat mendacio locus cum ignota essent externa... nunc vero, etc. (opposition of times),

Sen. Q. N. 4, 2, 24; so id. Ep. 97, 9; Mart. 2, 61, 1; cf. Don. ad Ter. And. 3, 3, 13 (3. a. a, 1. supra):

cum haec proderem habebant et Caesares juvenes sturnum, etc.,

Plin. 10, 41, 59, § 120.—

If the principal predicate denotes a point of time, and the predicate with cum a period of time, the former is in the perf. indic. unless changed by construction; the latter

In the imperf. indic., according to the rules a. a, except 2. (1) When the time of the cum clause is opposed to other periods of time:

res quom animam agebat tum esse offusam oportuit,

Plaut. Trin. 4, 3, 85; id. Truc. 4, 2, 20; id. Ep. 3, 3, 50 (3, 4, 21); id. Most. 5, 1, 68:

quod cum res agebatur nemo in me dixit, id tot annis post tu es inventus qui diceres?

Cic. Phil. 2, 9, 22; id. Rep. 2, 23, 43; id. Div. 1, 41, 92; 1, 45, 101; id. Ac. 2, 28, 90; id. Quint. 19, 60; 17, 54; 19, 61; id. Verr. 2, 3, 90, § 210 et saep.; Liv. 22, 60, 25; Verg. A. 4, 597; Tib. 1, 10, 8; 1, 10, 19; Prop. 2, 1, 31; 5 (4), 10, 24.—The subj. may be used if the principal action is represented as a consequence or result:

o, Astaphium, haut isto modo solita's me ante appellare, Sed blande, quom illuc quod aput vos nunc est, aput me haberem,

Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 60 (Lubbert conjectures habebam); Cic. Off. 2, 1, 2 and 3; id. Fin. 4, 27, 54; id. Rosc. Am. 4, 11; id. Verr. 2, 3, 57, § 130; id. Mur. 3, 8; Liv. 5, 53, 9; 10, 6, 9; 43, 21, 1;

44, 39, 7.— Hence the mood may change in co-ordinate clauses: tum, cum haberet haec res publica Luscinos, Calatinos, etc., homines... patientia paupertatis ornatos, et tum, cum erant Catones, Phili, etc., tamen hujusce modi res commissa nemini est (haberet, concessive),

Cic. Agr. 2, 24, 64.—(2) To make emphatic the coincidence of time, = eo ipso tempore (a. a, 4.):

cum is triumphus de Liguribus agebatur, Ligures... coloniam ipsam ceperunt,

Liv. 41, 14, 1; Cic. Sest. 26, 56; id. Phil. 2, 36, 90; id. Div. 2, 1, 3; id. Verr. 2, 5, 37, § 97; id. Att. 1, 4, 1.—(3) To preserve the peculiar force of the imperf. indic. (a. a, 3.): cum iste jam decedebat, ejus modi litteras ad eos misit, etc. (conative imperf.), Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 70, § 172:

cum Africanus censor tribu movebat centurionem... inquit,

id. de Or. 2, 67, 272 (cf.:

cum (censor) M. Antistio equum ademisset,

id. ib. 2, 71, 287).—

With the imperf. subj. (1) Always when cum means while (time during which): quomque caput caderet, carmen tuba sola peregit et, etc., Enn. ap. Lact. ad Stat. Th. 11, 56 (Ann. v. 508 Vahl.):

magistratus quom ibi adesset, occepta'st agi,

Ter. Eun. prol. 22 (Lubbert conjectures adsedit); Enn. ap. Macr. S. 6, 1 (Ann. v. 106 Vahl.):

Alexandrum uxor sua, cum simul cubaret, occidit,

Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 144:

armati, cum sui utrosque adhortarentur... in medium inter duas acies procedunt,

Liv. 1, 25, 1; Varr. R. R. 2, 81; Auct. Her. 4, 52, 65; Cic. Brut. 3, 10; id. Clu. 62, 175; Caes. B. G. 2, 19; id. B. C. 3, 57; Liv. 1, 30, 8; 10, 30, 3 et saep.—(2) To connect a logical (causal, etc.) relation with the temporal meaning (a. b, 1.):

cum ille Romuli senatus... temptaret ut ipse gereret sine rege rem publicam, populus id non tulit,

Cic. Rep. 2, 12, 23:

an pater familiarissimis suis succensuit cum Sullam et defenderent et laudarent? (causal),

id. Sull. 17, 49:

tum cum bello sociorum tota Italia arderet, homo non acerrimus... C. Norbanus in summo otio fuit (concessive),

id. Verr. 2, 5, 4, § 8:

quibus rebus cum unus in civitate maxime floreret, incidit in eandem invidiam, etc. (adversative),

Nep. Cim. 3, 1:

sed cum jam appropinquantium forma lemborum haud dubia esset... tunc injecta trepidatio est,

Liv. 44, 28, 10; Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 90, § 211; id. Clu. 31, 84; id. Mur. 3, 8; id. Phil. 3, 2, 3; id. Tusc. 1, 2, 4; Auct. Her. 4, 24, 33; Caes. B. C. 2, 7; Liv. 25, 9, 10; 21, 41, 12.—(3) To explain the main fact by circumstances:

quem quidem hercle ego, in exilium quom iret, redduxi domum,

Plaut. Merc. 5, 4, 19:

consule me, cum esset designatus tribunus, obtulit in discrimen vitam suam,

Cic. Sest. 28, 61:

haec epistula est, quam nos, in aedibus Apronii cum litteras conquireremus, invenimus,

id. Verr. 2, 3, 66, § 154: Socrates, cum XXX. tyranni essent, pedem porta non extulit, id. Att. 8, 2, 4:

Brundusii cum loquerer cum Phania, veni in eum sermonem ut dicerem, etc.,

id. Fam. 3, 5, 3:

itaque, cum populum in curias triginta divideret, nomina earum (Sabinarum) curiis imposuit,

Liv. 1, 13, 6:

Ap. Claudius, ovans cum in urbem iniret, decem milia pondo argenti, etc., in aerarium tulit,

id. 41, 28, 6; Cic. Clu. 20, 55; id. Phil. 12, 8, 20; id. Scaur. 47; id. Inv. 2, 31, 96; id. Tusc. 2, 22, 53; id. Div. 1, 52, 119; id. Off. 2, 8, 27; id. Or. 2, 55, 225 sq.; id. Fam. 1, 9, 13; 6, 6, 5; Liv. 1, 39, 4; 3, 63, 6; 4, 53, 11 et saep.—(4) To describe the place of the main action (a. a, 3.):

cum essem in castris ad fluvium Pyramum, redditae mihi sunt uno tempore a te epistulae duae,

Cic. Fam. 3, 11, 1;

so with cum essem (essemus, etc.),

id. ib. 2, 19, 1; 3, 4, 1; 13, 56, 1; id. Att. 1, 10, 1; 14, 19, 1; id. Ac. 1, 1, 1; id. Rep. 1, 39, 61; Varr. R. R. 3, 13; Caes. B. G. 4, 11 et saep.:

Eumenes rex ab Roma cum in regnum rediret... mactatus est ( = on the journey),

Liv. 42, 40, 8:

Agesilaus cum ex Aegypto reverteretur... in morbum implicitus decessit,

Nep. Ages. 8, 6.—The perf. indic. (cum fui, etc.) refers to temporary visits to a place:

Gallo narravi, cum proxime Romae fui, quid audissem,

Cic. Att. 13, 49, 2:

proxime cum in patria mea fui, venit ad me, etc.,

Plin. Ep. 4, 13, 3.—(5) To designate the time by natural occurrences (a. a, 4.):

ipsi comprehensi a me, cum jam dilucesceret, deducuntur,

Cic. Cat. 3, 3, 6:

cum advesperasceret, cum lucesceret,

id. Fam. 15, 4, 8:

cum lux appropinquaret,

id. Tull. 9, 21:

cum dies instaret,

id. Inv. 2, 31, 96:

cum comitiorum tempus adpeteret,

Liv. 28, 10, 1:

cum dies comitiorum adpropinquaret,

id. 3, 34, 7; 10, 13, 2.—But when a date is given as a point of time, the perf. indic. is used:

cum ea dies venit,

Liv. 4, 44, 10; 6, 20, 4.—(6) When the action of the cum clause is interrupted or ended by the main action:

cum hanc jam epistulam complicarem, tabellarii a vobis venerunt, etc.,

Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 5, § 17:

L. Octavius, cum multas jam causas diceret, adulescens est mortuus,

id. Brut. 68, 241:

cum plures jam tribus dicto esse audientem pontifici duumvirum juberent... ultimum de caelo quod comitia turbaret intervenit,

Liv. 40, 42, 10:

cum maxime conquereretur apud patres... repente strepitus ante curiam... auditur,

id. 8, 33, 4:

haec cum maxime dissereret, intervenit Tarquinius,

id. 1, 50, 7;

so with cum maxime,

Cic. Fam. 1, 5, a, 2; Liv. 23, 24, 6; 30, 33, 12.—(7) If the clause with cum has the force of a participial adjunct of the principal predicate (cum diceret = dicens, or dicendo):

Caesarem saepe accusavit, cum adfirmaret illum numquam, dum haec natio viveret, sine cura futurum ( = adfirmans, or adfirmando),

Cic. Sest. 63, 132:

Antigonus in proelio, cum adversus Seleucum dimicaret, occisus est ( = dimicans),

Nep. Reg. 3, 2:

impulit ut cuperem habere, cum diceret,

Varr. R. R. 3, 2, 8; Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 9 (11), 3; id. Clu. 42, 119; 56, 153; id. pro Corn. Maj. Fragm. 16; id. Mil. 5, 12; id. de Or. 1, 57, 243; id. Or. 37, 129; id. Fin. 1, 5, 16; id. Inv. 2, 34, 105; Val. Max. 1, 2, ext. 1; Ov. P. 1, 9, 42.—(8) In the historians, in a summary reference to events already related:

cum haec in Achaia atque apud Dyrrhachium gererentur... Caesar mittit, etc.,

Caes. B. C. 3, 57:

cum civitas in opere ac labore adsiduo reficiendae urbis teneretur, interim Q. Fabio... dicta dies est,

Liv. 6, 1, 6:

cum hic status in Boeotia esset, Perseus... misit,

id. 42, 56, 10; 33, 36, 1; 34, 22, 3; 38, 8, 1; 42, 64, 1; 45, 11, 1.—

In all other cases the imperf. subj. is regularly used in class. prose, even if the action of the clause with cum is logically independent of the principal sentence:

illum saepe audivi, hic, cum ego judicare jam aliquid possem, abfuit,

Cic. Brut. 71, 248: senatus consultum est factum de ambitu in Afranii sententiam, in quam ego dixeram, cum tu adesses. id. Q. Fr. 2, 7 (9), 3; so always (class.) with cum maxime, precisely when, just when:

cum maxime haec in senatu agerentur, Canuleius... (ad populum) ita disseruit,

Liv. 4, 3, 1:

cum maxime Capua circumvallaretur, Syracusarum oppugnatio ad finem venit,

id. 25, 23, 1.—In a very few instances the imperf. indic. occurs without apparent reason: an vero cum honos agebatur familiae vestrae... succensuit [p. 494] pater tuus cum Sullam defenderent (probably to distinguish the two cum clauses), Cic. Sull. 17, 49 (cf.:

cum jus amicitiae, societatis, adfinitatis ageretur, cum, etc., eo tempore tu non modo non... retulisti, sed ne ipse quidem, etc.,

id. Quint. 16, 53):

ille versus, qui in te erat collatus cum aedilitatem petebas,

id. Q. Fr. 1, 3, 8:

cum ex oppido exportabatur (Dianae statua) quem conventum mulierum factum esse arbitramini?... Quid hoc tota Sicilia est clarius quam omnes convenisse cum Diana exportaretur ex oppido? etc.,

id. Verr. 2, 4, 35, § 77.—Poets and post-class. writers frequently disregard the class. usage, the former by using either mood instead of the other, the latter by the un-Ciceronian use of the subj.; v. Prop. 2, 9, 15; 5 (4), 4, 10; Tib. 1, 10, 16; Verg. A. 7, 148; 12, 735; Mart. 13, 122; Curt. 8, 12, 16; 9, 2, 24; Quint. 11, 1, 89; Plin. 36, 6, 5, § 46; Dig. 28, 1, 22, § 1; Gell. strangely uses an imperf. indic. where class. writers would use a subj.:

sed ego, homines cum considerabam, alterum fidei, alterum probri plenum, nequaquam adduci potui ad absolvendum,

Gell. 14, 2, 10; cf.:

cum secum reputavit,

Tac. A. 15, 54.

In adverbial clauses denoting identity of action (if the principal sentence and the clause with cum denote not different actions, but one action, which, expressed by the latter clause, is by the principal sentence defined in its meaning and import, the clause with cum always takes the indic., except once or twice post-class., and almost always the same tense as the principal sentence), when, by, in, etc.

The predicate in present:

amice facis Quom me laudas,

Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 31; id. Poen. 3, 2, 12; 3, 5, 15; Ter. And. prol. 18; id. Ad. 1, 2, 16 et saep.:

bene facitis cum venitis,

Auct. Her. 4, 50, 63:

quae cum taces, nulla esse concedis,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 19, 54; 21, 58; id. Clu. 47, 132; Liv. 25, 6, 5 et saep.—

With fut. (rare):

cum igitur proferent aliquid hujusmodi... inventum proferent,

Cic. Inv. 1, 40, 75; id. Fl. 39, 99; Plin. Ep. 7, 24, 9.—

With fut. perf. (rare):

quod cum dederis, illud dederis ut is absolvatur,

Cic. Div. in Caecil. 7, 23; id. Lig. 12, 36; id. Part. Or. 39; Auct. Her. 4, 30, 41.—

With perf.:

fecisti furtum quom istaec flagitia me celavisti et patrem,

Plaut. Bacch. 1, 2, 60; 1, 2, 52; id. Cas. 4, 4, 18 (22); id. Capt. 2, 3, 52; Ter. Phorm. prol. 32 et saep.:

loco ille motus est cum ex urbe est depulsus,

Cic. Cat. 2, 1, 1; id. Verr. 2, 5, 23, § 59; id. Fam. 11, 29, 2; id. Rosc. Am. 14, 39; Liv. 5, 49, 8; 9, 8, 4; Val. Max. 3, 7, ext. 1; Curt. 6, 10, 9; Quint. 1, 10, 47 et saep.—

With histor. pres.:

Orestes cum se defendit, in matrem confert crimen,

Auct. Her. 1, 15, 25.—

With imperf.:

cum grandiorem aetatem ad consulatum constituebant, adulescentiae temeritatem verebantur,

Cic. Phil. 5, 17, 47; 14, 10, 28; id. Fl. 33, 83; id. Lig. 6, 18; id. Fam. 6, 1, 3; id. Off. 3, 10, 40; id. Sen. 6, 15 et saep.—

Imperf. with perf. ( poet. and post-class.;

very rare): quid quod et ominibus certis prohibebar amori Indulgere meo, tum cum mihi ferre jubenti Excidit et fecit spes nostras cera caducas,

Ov. M. 9, 595 sq.; Val. Max. 9, 1, 5.—

With pluperf. (very rare):

exspectationem nobis non parvam attuleras cum scripseras, etc.,

Cic. Att. 3, 18, 1; id. Sest. 16, 37.—

Pluperf. and imperf.:

quod quidem tibi ostenderam cum a me Capuam reiciebam,

Cic. Att. 8, 11, D, 5.—

Imperf. subj. (post-class.):

tunc venena edebat bibebatque, cum immensis epulis non delectaretur tantum, sed gloriaretur,

Sen. Cons. Helv. 10, 10.—

Often relatively added to nouns when a relative clause must be supplied:

illa scelera... cum ejus domum evertisti, cujus, etc.,

which you committed when (by), Cic. Pis. 34, 83; id. Imp. Pomp. 12, 33; id. Verr. 2, 5, 13, § 33; Liv. 5, 3, 4; 23, 9, 11; 29, 17, 9.

In relative clauses, = quo tempore, quo, etc.

Dependent on nouns designating time, the mood follows the general rules of relative clauses.

The principal sentence is a formal statement of indefinite time, with the copula (tempus fuit cum, or fuit cum, analogous to sunt qui, etc.); generally with subj., but sometimes indic., when sunt qui would take this mood.

With pres. or fut. indic.: nunc est profecto (i. e. tempus), interfici quom perpeti me possum (the ante-class. writers construe sunt qui with indic.), Ter. Eun. 3, 5, 3; id. And. 1, 1, 125:

jam aderit tempus quom sese etiam ipse oderit,

Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 12; Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 28.—

With pres. subj.: nunc est ille dies quom gloria maxima sese nobis ostendat, si vivimus, sive morimur, Enn. ap. Prisc. 10, p. 880 P. (Ann. v. 383 Vahl.); so Plaut. Capt. 3, 3, 1:

erit illud profecto tempus et illucescet aliquando dies cum... amicissimi benevolentiam desideres,

Cic. Mil. 25, 69; Val. Max. 6, 2, 9.—

With preterites, indic., Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 29:

fuit quoddam tempus cum in agris homines bestiarum more vagabantur,

Cic. Inv. 1, 2, 2 (cf.:

fuerunt alia genera qui... dicebant,

id. de Or. 3, 17, 62):

fuit cum hoc dici poterat (potuisset would be hypothetical),

Liv. 7, 32, 13.—

With preterites, subj., Ter. Heaut. 5, 4, 1:

quod fuit tempus cum rura colerent homines,

Varr. R. R. 3, 1:

ac fuit cum mihi quoque initium requiescendi concessum arbitrarer,

Cic. Or. 1, 1, 1; so id. Brut. 2, 7; Caes. B. G. 6, 24.—

Attributively with nouns denoting time (tempus, dies, etc.), in ordinary sentences.

With pres. or fut. indic.:

incidunt saepe tempora cum ea commutantur,

Cic. Off. 1, 10, 31:

longum illud tempus cum non ero, etc.,

id. Att. 12, 8, 1; id. Verr. 2, 5, 69, § 177; id. Quint. 2, 8; id. Sen. 23, 84.—With potential subj., Cic. Att. 3, 3.—

With past tenses, indic., Plaut. Am. prol. 91; id. rud. 2, 6, 12; Ter. And. 5, 3, 12:

atque ille eo tempore paruit cum parere senatui necesse erat,

Cic. Lig. 7, 20:

memini noctis illius cum... pollicebar,

id. Planc. 42, 101; id. Phil. 2, 18, 45; 2, 35, 88; id. Imp. Pomp. 15, 44; id. Sest. 7, 15; 29, 62; id. Sull. 18, 52; id. Fam. 11, 8, 1; 11, 27, 3; id. de Or. 1, 11, 45; Sall. J. 31, 20; Ov. Tr. 4, 10, 6; Prop. 1, 10, 5; 1, 22, 5; Gell. 1, 23, 2 et saep.—So with nouns implying time:

illa pugna quom, etc. ( = in qua),

Plaut. Poen. 2, 26;

Marcellino Consule, cum ego... putabam ( = anno Marcellini, quo, etc.),

Cic. Att. 9, 9, 4:

patrum nostrorum memoria cum exercitus videbatur ( = tempore quo),

Caes. B. G. 1, 40; Cic. Fam. 13, 1, 2; Liv. 6, 40, 17.—

With preterites in subj., Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 30:

accepit enim agrum iis temporibus cum jacerent pretia praediorum,

Cic. Rosc. Com. 12, 33; so id. Off. 2, 19, 65:

numerandus est ille annus cum obmutuisset senatus?

id. Pis. 12, 26; so id. Verr. 2, 4, 35, § 77; id. Rep. 2, 37, 62; id. Font. 3, 6; Liv. 3, 65, 8:

haec scripsi postridie ejus diei cum castra haberem Mopsuhestiae (cf. habebam, as epistolary tense),

Cic. Fam. 3, 8, 10.—If the clause does not define the noun, but is a co-ordinate designation of time, it follows the rule of adverbial clauses:

eodem anno, cum omnia infida Romanis essent, Capuae quoque conjurationes factae,

while, Liv. 9, 26, 5; Cic. Rep. 2, 36, 61; id. de Or. 2, 3, 12; Liv. 8, 15, 1; 1, 41, 6.—

Appositively added to temporal adverbs and to dates (heri, hodie, medius, tertius, olim, antea, quondam, nuper, olim, postea) following the rules of adverbial clauses:

Crassus hodie, cum vos non adessetis, posuit idem, etc.,

Cic. de Or. 2, 10, 41:

omnia quae a te nudius tertius dicta sunt, cum docere velles, etc.,

id. N. D. 3, 7, 18; id. Sest. 48, 103; id. Att. 4, 3, 2; id. Inv. 2, 1, 1; id. Rep. 1, 39, 61; Caes. B. C. 2, 17 et saep.—So with dates (always subj.. except with cum haec scribebam, or dabam):

posteaquam Pompeius apud populum ad VIII. Id. Febr., cum pro Milone diceret, clamore convicioque jactatus est,

Cic. Fam. 1, 5, b, 1; 3, 3, 1; 3, 4, 1; 4, 2, 1; id. Att. 14, 19, 1.—

The principal sentence defines a period of time during which the action of the clause has or had lasted, always with indic., and after the words defining the period, = per quod tempus, when, that, during which, while, etc.

With pres., = Engl. pres. perf.

With cardinal, definite or indefinite. (1) Time in acc. (ante-class.):

hanc domum Jam multos annos est quom possideo,

that I have been the owner, Plaut. Aul. prol. 4; cf. id. Merc. 3, 1, 37.—(2) Time in nom.:

anni sunt octo cum ista causa in ista meditatione versatur,

Cic. Clu. 30, 82; id. Or. 51, 171; id. Fam. 15, 14, 1; id. Div. 2, 36, 76.—

With ordinals:

vigesimus annus est, cum omnes scelerati me unum petunt,

Cic. Phil. 12, 10, 24; Verg. A. 5, 627; 3, 646.—

With diu:

jam diu'st quom ventri victum non datis,

Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 146; Gell. 1, 25, 12.—

Perf. with negation, the principal predicate in pres. or logical perf., = Engl. pres. perf.:

quia septem menses sunt quom in hasce aedes pedem Nemo intro tetulit,

Plaut. Most. 2, 2, 39; id. Men. 3, 1, 3; Prop. 3, 8, 33 (2, 16, 33. —

With pluperf., the principal predicate in imperf.:

permulti jam anni erant cum inter patricios magistratus tribunosque nulla certamina fuerant,

Liv. 9, 33, 3.—

With imperf., the principal predicate in perf. or pluperf.:

dies triginta aut plus in ea navi fui, Quom interea semper mortem exspectabam miser,

Ter. Hec. 3, 4, 7:

unus et alter dies intercesserat, cum res parum certa videbatur,

Cic. Clu. 26, 72.—

The principal sentence specifying a period of time which has or had elapsed since the action took place, = ex ejus tempore, since or after, always with indic.; the principal predicate pres. or logical perf., cum with perf. indic.

With cardinals.

Time in acc. (ante-class.):

annos factum'st sedecim Quom conspicatus est primo crepusculo Puellam exponi,

Plaut. Cas. prol. 39; so probably id. Pers. 1, 3, 57; id. Trin. 2, 4, 1; id. Merc. 3, 1, 37.—

With nom.:

nondum centum et decem anni sunt cum de pecuniis repetundis lata lex est,

Cic. Off. 2, 21, 75; id. Fam. 15, 16, 3; id. Att. 9, 11, A, 2.—

With diu or dudum:

nam illi quidem haut sane diu'st quom dentes exciderunt,

Plaut. Merc. 3, 1, 42; id. As. 2, 1, 3; id. Trin. 4, 3, 3.—

Peculiarly, cum referring to an action which was to be done after a period of time, before, at the end of which:

omnino biduum supererat cum exercitui frumentum metiri oporteret,

Caes. B. G. 1, 23. —

In inverted clauses, the principal sentence determining the time of the clause, cum ( = quo tempore) having the force of a relative; cum with the indic. always following the principal sentence; never in oblique discourse; very freq. in class. and post-class. writings (ante-class. only Plaut. Men. 5, 8, 3; Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 40; id. Eun. 4, 2, 5); principal sentence often with jam, vix, vixdum, nondum, tantum quod, and commodum; cum often with subito, repente, sometimes interim, tamen, etiamtum.

Principal sentence defining time by temporal expressions.

Principal sentence with pluperf. (1) Cum with perf. or histor. pres.:

dies nondum decem intercesserant cum ille alter filius necatur,

Cic. Clu. 9, 28; id. Verr. 1, 2, 36; id. Or. 2, 21, 89; Ov. M. 9, 715; Plin. Pan. 91, 1.—(2) Cum with histor. inf., Sall. J. 98, 2.—

Principal sentence with imperf. (1) Cum with perf. or histor. pres.:

nondum lucebat cum Ameriae scitum est,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 34, 97; Liv. 21, 59, 5; 41, 26, 2; 22, 1, 1; 9, 33, 3; 9, 37, 5; Verg. G. 2, 340; Curt. 4, 3, 16; 5, 12, 6 al.—(2) Cum with imperf., Curt. 6, 7, 1.—

Principal sentence with perf., cum with perf.:

dies haud multi intercesserunt cum ex Leontinis praesidium... venerunt,

Liv. 24, 29, 1; 40, 48, 4.—

Principal sentence not containing expressions of time; most freq. with pluperf. or imperf. in principal sentence, and perf. or histor. pres. in clause with cum, but (far more rarely) many other combinations occur.

Principal sentence with imperf., cum with perf.:

non dubitabat Minucius quin, etc., cum repente jubetur dicere,

Cic. Verr. 1, 2, 29, § 72:

jamque hoc facere noctu adparabant cum matres familiae repente... procucurrerunt,

Caes. B. G. 7, 26, 3; Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 14, § 36; Liv. 1, 36, 1 (57 times); Verg. A. 1, 36 (26 times); Vell. 2, 28, 2; Sen. Ira, 1, 18, 3; Tac. A. 3, 1 (31 times); Curt. 3, 10, 1 (19 times); Plin. Ep. 6, 24, 2.—

Principal sentence with pluperf., cum with perf. or histor. pres.:

jam Sora capta erat cum consules prima luce advenere,

Liv. 9, 24, 13 (32 times); Cic. Clu. 9, 28 (14 times); Sall. J. 60, 6; Verg. A. 1, 586 (13 times); Tac. A. 1, 19 (13 times); Curt. 3, 10, 1 (18 times). —And cum with potential subj.:

vix erat hoc plane imperatum cum illum spoliatum... videres,

Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 40, § 86.—

Principal sentence with perf., Cic. Sest. 37, 39 (5 times); Liv. 2, 46, 3 (8 times).—

Principal sentence with histor. inf., Liv. 5, 46, 1; Tac. A. 1, 11; 11, 16; Curt. 5, 9, 1; 9, 5, 1.—

Principal sentence with histor. pres., Liv. 4, 32, 1 (3 times); Ov. M. 4, 695 (5 times).—

Cum with imperf., Cic. Verr. 1, 6, 17 (3 times); Sall. J. 51, 2; Liv. 44, 10, 6; Tac. A. 1, 51; 11, 26.—

Cum with [p. 495] histor. inf., Liv. 2, 27, 1; Tac. A. 2, 31 (6 times); Curt. 4, 4, 9.—

Cum with pluperf., Liv. 2, 46, 3 (3 times); Ov. M. 14, 581; Verg. A. 2, 256 sq.—

With logical perf., or logical perf. and pres. (rare):

quam multi enim jam oratores commemorati sunt... cum tamen spisse ad Antonium Crassumque pervenimus,

Cic. Brut. 36, 138:

jamque fuga timidum caput abdidit alte (coluber), Cum medii nexus extremaeque agmina caudae Solvuntur,

Verg. G. 3, 422.—

In clauses added loosely or parenthetically to a preceding clause or to a substantive in it (the mood governed by the rules for relative clauses).

When, on an occasion, on which, etc.

With perf. indic.:

Hortensium maxime probavi pro Messala dicentem, cum tu abfuisti,

Cic. Brut. 96, 328; id. Phil. 11, 8, 18; id. Dom. 9, 22; 53, 136; id. Fam. 13, 75, 1; Spart. Had. 3; Flor. 1, 18, 9 (1, 13, 19).—

With imperf. indic.:

num infitiari potes te illo ipso die meis praesidiis circumclusum commovere te non potuisse, cum tu nostra... caede contentum esse dicebas?

Cic. Cat. 1, 3, 7; id. Sest. 63, 131; id. Cael. 24, 59.—

Cum with pres. indic., a past tense in principal sentence (mostly poet.):

nox erat et placidum carpebant fessa soporem Corpora... cum medio volvuntur sidera lapsu, Cum tacet omnis ager, etc.,

Verg. A. 4, 522; 8, 407; 12, 114; id. E. 8, 15; Hor. S. 1, 10, 31; Plin. Ep. 6, 16, 22.—

Imperf. subj.: qui... accensi nulla deinde vi sustineri potuere, cum compulsi in castra Romani rursus obsiderentur, in consequence of which ( = ita ut), Liv. 3, 5, 8.—

So freq. cum quidem, always with indic.:

sed uterque noster cedere cogebatur, cum quidem ille pollicitus est, se quod velletis esse facturum,

Cic. Phil. 9, 4, 9; id. Fl. 22, 53; id. Pis. 9, 21; 34, 83 and 84; id. Leg. 2, 6, 14; id. Sen. 4, 11; Suet. Caes. 50; Spart. Had. 9; id. Ael. Ver. 4.—

Cum tamen, at which time however, and yet, while nevertheless, representing the principal sentence as concessive, analogous to qui tamen (v. tamen).

With indic., like qui tamen, always, except for particular reasons:

fit gemitus omnium et clamor, cum tamen a praesenti supplicio tuo continuit populus Romanus se, etc.,

Cic. Verr. 1, 5, 29, § 74; id. Pis. 12, 27; Liv. 6, 42, 11; Verg. A. 9, 513; Tac. H. 1, 62; so,

cum nihilo magis,

Nep. Dat. 10, 3; passing over into inverted cum clauses (4. b.), as Sall. J. 98, 2; Liv. 27, 20, 11.—

With subj., Cic. Phil. 2, 18, 45; id. Fam. 1, 9, 10; Liv. 4, 31, 6 (where the clause with cum is adverbial).—

Cum interea (interim).

Adverbial (rare).

Temporal with subj.; with subj. imperf., while, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 25, § 62; with pluperf. subj., after, id. ib. 1, 2, 9, § 25; id. Fam. 15, 43.—

Adversative, with subj., whereas during this time. (1) Pres.:

simulat se eorum praesidio conflteri, cum interea aliud quiddam jam diu machinetur,

Cic. Verr. 1, 6, 15; Val. Max. 2, 9, 1; Sen. Q. N. 1, prol. 14.—(2) With perf. subj.:

cum tu interim vero numquam significaris sententiam tuam,

Cic. Pis. 4, 9; id. Rosc. Am. 5, 11 dub.; Val. Max. 7, 8, 6.—(3) With imperf. subj., Cic. Sull. 5, 6; Plin. Pan. 76, 1.—

Relative, always with indic., in class. writings always referring to a period during which, belonging,

To the attributive clauses (v. 2. supra). (1) In pres.:

anni sunt octo... cum interea Cluentianae pecuniae vestigium nullum invenitis,

Cic. Clu. 30, 82; Liv. 5, 54, 5; Plaut. Stich. 1, 1, 33.— (2) In imperf., Ter. Hec. 3, 4, 8 (2. c.).—

To the inverted clauses (4.):

tanta erat in his locis multitudo cum interim Rufio noster... hominem percussit,

Cic. Att. 5, 2, 2.—So probably: cum interim Gallus quidam processit, Quadrig. ap. Gell. 9, 13, 7; Cic. Fam. 3, 6, 5; id. Pis. 38, 92 sq.; id. Tusc. 4, 3, 6; Sall. J. 12, 5; 49, 4; Liv. 3, 37, 5; Val. Max. 8, 1, 3; 9, 7, 2; Sen. Ira, 2, 33, 4; Tac. H. 1, 60; with indefinite pres. indic. in both terms, Sen. Cons. Marc. 11, 5.—

To the additional clauses (5.). (1) With perf. indic., Plaut. Men. 3, 1, 3; Flor. 4, 2, 69; 4, 12, 33; with inf. in oblique discourse, Liv. 4, 51, 4; 6, 27, 6.—(2) Post-Aug., and in Nep., = cum tamen (5. b.), while nevertheless, whereas, with pres. or perf. indic.:

post Leuctricam pugnam Lacedaemonii se numquam refecerunt... cum interim Agesilaus non destitit patriam juvare,

Nep. Ages. 7, 1: cum interim Oedipodis ossa... colis, Val. Max. 5, 3, ext. 3; 3, 4, 5; 4, 4, 1; Quint. 10, 1, 18; 10, 1, 11; 12, 10, 67; Tac. H. 4, 42; Suet. Claud. 6; Flor. 4, 12, 33.

In clauses completing the idea of the governing verb.

After verbs of perception (videre, perspicere, audire, etc.; audivi cum diceres, etc. = audivi te dicentem).

Dependent on verbs of seeing and feeling.

With indic.:

nam ipsi vident eorum quom auferimus bona ( = nos auferre or auferentes),

Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 16; id. Poen. 3, 4, 13; id. Am. 5, 1, 19; id. Bacch. 3, 3, 65; id. Mil. 2, 6, 26:

conspectum est cum obiit,

Liv. 5, 25, 3.—

With subj.:

is... numquam est conspectus cum veniret,

Cic. Sest. 59, 126:

vidi... Cum tu terga dares,

Ov. M. 13, 224.—

After verbs of hearing, always with subj.:

L. Flaccum ego audivi cum diceret Caeciliam exisse, etc.,

Cic. Div. 1, 46, 104; id. Par. 6, 1, 45; id. de Or. 2, 6, 22; 2, 28, 129; 2, 33, 144; 2, 37, 155; 2, 90, 365; id. Brut. 27, 85; id. Fin. 5, 19, 54; id. Fam. 3, 7, 4; Sen. Ben. 5, 24, 1.—

After memini, with indic. (sc. tempus):

memini quom... haud audebat,

Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 53:

memini cum mihi desipere videbare,

Cic. Fam. 7, 28, 1.—With subj.:

memini cum velles residere ferventissimo sole,

Sen. Ben. 5, 24, 1.—

After verba adfectuum, with the force of quod, always with indic. (mostly ante-class.).

Verbs of thanking:

habeo gratiam tibi Quom copiam istam mi et potestatem facis,

Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 14; id. Curc. 5, 3, 21; id. As. 3, 2, 2; id. Most. 2, 2, 2; id. Poen. 1, 2, 46; 5, 4, 84 (99); Ter. And. 4, 4, 32; id. Ad. 1, 2, 59:

tibi maximas gratias ago, cum tantum litterae meae potuerunt, ut eis lectis, etc.,

Cic. Fam. 13, 24, 2.—

Of congratulation:

quom tu's aucta liberis... gratulor,

Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 33; 2, 6, 35: L. Caesar, O mi Cicero, inquit, gratulor tibi cum tantum vales apud Dolabellam, etc., L. Caesar ap. Cic. Fam. 9, 14, 3; and ib. Att. 14, 17, A, 3.—

Of rejoicing and grieving:

quom istaec res tibi ex sententia Pulcre evenit, gaudeo,

Plaut. Rud. 5, 3, 10; id. Poen. 5, 5, 48:

cum vero in C. Matii familiaritatem venisti, non dici potest quam valde gaudeam,

Cic. Fam. 7, 15, 2; Sall. J. 102, 5.—

Dependent on optative sentences:

di tibi bene faciant semper quom advocatus bene mi ades,

Plaut. Mil. 5, 26; id. Poen. 3, 3, 54; 3, 3, 74; Ter. Ad. 5, 7, 19.

Elliptical usages (without predicate).

Cum maxime.

With ut: hanc Bacchidem Amabat, ut quom maxime, tum Pamphilus ( = ut amabat tum quom maxume amabat, as much as he ever did), Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 40:

etiamne ea neglegamus, quae fiunt cum maxime, quae videmus?

Cic. Har. Resp. 15, 32.—Hence,

By abbreviation: nunc cum maxime or cum maxime alone, now especially, just now: tum cum maxime, just then:

nunc cum maxume operis aliquid facere credo,

Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 2; id. Phorm. 1, 4, 26; id. Heaut. 4, 5, 40:

quae multos jam annos et nunc cum maxime filium interfectum cupit,

Cic. Clu. 5, 12:

castra amissa, et tum cum maxime ardere,

Liv. 40, 32, 1; Curt. 3, 2, 17; Sen. Ira, 1, 16, 3; id. Ben. 3, 3, 3; id. Ep. 55, 1; 55, 11; 81, 7; Tac. Or. 16; 37; Eum. pro Schol. 4; Mamert. 2.—With maxime in adverbial clauses, just while, especially when, Cic. Att. 2, 15, 3; id. Off. 1, 13, 41; id. Fam. 1, 5, a, 2; Liv. 1, 50, 7; 2, 59, 7; 3, 25, 4; 3, 31, 3; 4, 3, 1; 8, 33, 4 et saep.—

Similarly with other superlatives (post-class.):

foliis ternis, aut, cum plurimum, quaternis,

at the utmost, Plin. 25, 10, 74, § 121; 18, 7, 10, § 60:

cum tardissime,

id. 18, 7, 10, § 51:

cum longissime,

Suet. Tib. 38.

For co-ordinate clauses with cum... tum, v. tum, I. A. 3.

Causal, since, because, as.

Anteclass., chiefly with indic.

With pres. indic.:

hoc hic quidem homines tam brevem vitam colunt, Quom hasce herbas hujus modi in suom alvom congerunt,

because, Plaut. Ps. 3, 2, 34; id. Truc. 1, 2, 50; 2, 4, 8:

edepol, merito esse iratum arbitror, Quom apud te tam parva'st ei fides,

since, id. Ps. 1, 5, 62; id. Most. 1, 1, 28; id. Truc. 2, 1, 32; Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 30; id. Hec. 4, 1, 53.—

With perf. indic.:

praesertim quom is me dignum quoi concrederet Habuit, me habere honorem ejus ingenio decet,

Plaut. As. 1, 1, 66; Ter. And. 3, 2, 8.—

With subj.

By construction of principal sentence: adeon, me fuisse fungum ut qui illi crederem, Quom mi ipsum nomen ejus Clamaret, etc., Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 51; id. Capt. 1, 2, 37; Ter. Hec. 3, 2, 6; id. Eun. 3, 5, 18; 5, 2, 24.—

Independent of such construction:

jam istoc probior es meo quidem animo quom in amore temperes,

Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 8 (bracketed by Goetz;

Brix conjectures temperas): nil miror si lubenter tu hic eras, Quom ego servos quando aspicio hunc lacrumem quia dijungimur,

id. Mil. 4, 8, 18 Lorenz (Brix: quin ego... lacrumo; cf.

Lubbert, Grammat. Stud. II. pp. 133, 137): Nam puerum injussu eredo non tollent meo, Praesertim in ea re quom sit mi adjutrix socrus,

Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 82; so id. Ad. 2, 1, 12.

Class. and post-class., always with subj.

With pres. subj.:

cum ista sis auctoritate, non debes arripere maledictum ex trivio,

Cic. Mur. 6, 13:

cum vita sine amicis insidiarum et metus plena sit, ratio ipsa monet amicitias comparare,

id. Fin. 1, 20, 66:

quae cum ita sint, videamus, etc.,

id. Clu. 44, 123:

quod cum ita sit, etc.,

id. Fam. 3, 1, 1; id. Mur. 1, 2; id. Arch. 5, 10; id. Off. 3, 3, 13; id. Rosc. Am. 8, 22; Liv. 7, 9, 5; 21, 21, 5 et saep.—

With perf. subj.:

cum inimicitiae fuerint numquam, opinio injuriae beneficiis sit exstincta... rei publicae providebo,

Cic. Prov. Cons. 20, 47; id. de Or. 1, 49, 214; the perf. subj. is often retained after a principal predicate in a past tense, id. Clu. 60, 167; id. Fam. 3, 8, 4.—

With imperf. subj.

Denoting both cause and coincidence of time:

vacuum fundum, cum ego adessem, possidere non potuisti,

Auct. Her. 4, 29, 40; Cic. Or. 8, 25:

cum tanta multitudo lapides et tela conicerent, in muro consistendi potestas erat nulli,

Caes. B. G. 2, 6; id. B. C. 3, 1; Liv. 39, 31, 3; 4, 8, 3; 25, 11, 1.—

Denoting cause without time:

cum esset egens, sumptuosus, audax... ad omnem fraudem versare suam mentem coepit,

Cic. Clu. 26, 70:

quod oppidum cum esset altissimo et munitissimo loco, ad existimationem imperii arbitratus sum, comprimere eorum audaciam,

id. Fam. 15, 4, 10; Caes. B. C. 3, 37.—

With pluperf. subj.:

Caesar cum constituisset hiemare in continenti, neque multum aestatis superesset, obsides imperat, etc.,

Caes. B. G. 5, 22.

With adverbs of emphasis.

Praesertim cum, or cum praesertim, = especially since, the more so because:

quae cum ita sint, quid est quod de ejus civitate dubitetis, praesertim cum aliis quoque civitatibus fuerit adscriptus?

Cic. Arch. 5, 10:

cur enim tibi hoc non gratificor nescio, praesertim cum his temporibus audacia pro sapientia liceat uti,

id. Fam. 1, 10, 1:

cum praesertim vos alium miseritis,

id. Imp. Pomp. 5, 12; id. Rosc. Am. 8, 22; id. Prov. Cons. 7, 16 (cum praesertim rarely refers to time, with indic., Sen. Ep. 85, 6).—

Quippe cum represents the conclusion as selfevident, since of course, since obviously:

nihil est virtute amabilius, quippe cum propter virtutem etiam eos, quos numquam videmus, quodammodo diligamus,

Cic. Lael. 8, 28:

numquam ego pecunias istorum, etc., in bonis rebus duxi, quippe cum viderem, etc.,

id. Par. 1, 1, 6; id. Leg. 1, 1, 5; 1, 20, 54; id. Fin. 3, 12, 41; 5, 28, 84; Liv. 4, 27, 8; 4, 57, 10.—Sometimes with indic. if cum refers to time, when of course, if, of course: tu vero etiam si reprehenderes... laetarer: quippe cum in reprehensione est prudentia cum eumeneiai, Cic. Att. 16, 11, 2.—In later writers with indic., because when:

omnia experiri necessitas cogebat: quippe cum primas spes fortuna destituit, futura praesentibus videntur esse potiora,

Curt. 4, 1, 29.—

Utpote cum, seeing that, explanatory, with subj.:

me incommoda valetudo qua jam emerseram, utpote cum sine febri laborassem, tenebat Brundusii,

Cic. Att. 5, 8, 1; Cels. 1 prooem.; Sen. Cons. Marc. 21, 2.

Adversative, while, whereas, denoting a logical contrast with the principal sentence.

Ante-class., chiefly,

With indic.:

hei mihi, insanire me aiunt, ultro quom ipsi insaniunt,

Plaut. Men. 5, 2, 80; id. Stich. 1, 37; id. Bacch. 5, 2, 5; Ter. Phorm. prol. 23; 2, 2, 26.—

By construction of principal predicate:

tibi obtemperem quom tu mihi nequeas?

Plaut. Most. 4, 2, 16 (4, 1, 50).—

Independent of construction: edepol, Cupido, quom tam pausillus sis, nimis multum vales, Naev. ap. Non. p. 421, 25 (Lubbert conjectures quom [p. 496] tu's tam pausillus):

eo vos madefacitis, quom ego sim hic siccus?

Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 52.

Class. and post-class., always with subj.

With pres. subj.:

cum de bonis et de caede agatur, testimonium dicturus est is qui et sector est et sicarius,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 36, 103; id. Clu. 24, 65; id. Leg. 1, 7, 22:

et cum tibi, viro, liceat purpura in veste stragula uti, matrem familias tuam purpureum amiculum habere non sines?

Liv. 34, 7, 3; Sen. Prov. 4, 10; id. Clem. 1, 18, 2; id. Ben. 2, 16, 1.—

With perf. subj.: an tu, cum omnem auctoritatem universi ordinis pro pignore putaris, eamque... concideris, me his existimas pignoribus terreri? Crass. ap. Cic. de Or. 3, 1, 4:

indignatur exul aliquid sibi deesse, cum defuerit Scipioni dos?

Sen. Cons. Helv. 12, 7; id. Ira, 3, 12, 7; freq. pres. and perf. subj. retained, if dependent on preterites, Cic. Brut. 71, 250; id. Agr. 3, 2, 5.—

With imperf. subj.:

ita, cum maximis eum rebus liberares, perparvam amicitiae culpam relinquebas,

Cic. Deiot. 3, 10:

hunc Egnatium censores, cum patrem eicerent, retinuerunt,

id. Clu. 48, 135:

eorum erat V. milium numerus, cum ipsi non amplius octingentos equites haberent,

Caes. B. G. 4, 11; Liv. 1, 55, 3; Cic. de Or. 1, 1, 1; 1, 53, 227; 2, 50, 203; id. Clu. 5, 12; id. Ac. 1, 10, 38 sq.; Liv. 39, 49, 1; Val. Max. 1, 6, 11; 3, 2, 10 fin. —

With pluperf. subj.:

Socratis ingenium immortalitati scriptis suis Plato tradidit, cum ipse litteram Socrates nullam reliquisset,

Cic. de Or. 3, 16, 60; id. Ac. 2, 1, 2; id. Prov. Cons. 11, 27; Val. Max. 1, 8, 11.

Concessive, although, denoting a reason for the contrary of the principal sentence.

Ante-class., mostly with indic.

Indic.:

qui it lavatum In balineas, quom ibi sedulo sua vestimenta servat, Tam subripiuntur,

Plaut. Rud. 2, 3, 52; Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 12; Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 26; id. Truc. 1, 2, 89 (95); id. Stich. 1, 2, 67.—

With subj.: nihilominus ipsi lucet, quom illi accenderit, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 16, 51 (Trag. Rel. v. 389 Rib.).

Class. and post-class., always with subj.

Pres. subj.:

testis est Graecia, quae cum eloquentiae studio sit incensa, jamdiuque excellat in ea... tamen omnis artis vetustiores habet,

Cic. Brut. 7, 26:

nam (Druentia) cum aquae vim vehat ingentem, non tamen navium patiens est,

Liv. 21, 31, 11.—

Imperf. subj.:

ego autem, cum consilium tuum probarem, et idem ipse sentirem, nihil proficiebam,

Cic. Fam. 4, 1, 1:

non poterant tamen, cum cuperent, Apronium imitari,

id. Verr. 2, 3, 34, § 78; id. de Or. 1, 28, 126; id. Brut. 7, 28; 91, 314; id. Inv. 2, 31, 97; id. Clu. 40, 110; Caes. B. G. 5, 40; Liv. 5, 38, 5; Nep. Att. 13, 1; so,

quae cum ita essent... tamen,

although this was so, Cic. Clu. 34, 94; id. Fam. 2, 16, 2.—

With pluperf. subj.:

cui cum Cato et Caninius intercessissent, tamen est perscripta,

Cic. Fam. 1, 2, 4:

patrem meum, cum proscriptus non esset, jugulastis,

id. Rosc. Am. 11, 32.

In hypothetical clauses, always with imperf. or pluperf. subj., = si, but defining an assumed or fictitious time.

With imperf. subj.:

quis ex populo, cum Scaevolam dicentem audiret in ea causa, quicquam politius aut elegantius exspectaret?

Cic. Brut. 55, 194:

etiam tum quiesceretis cum rem publicam a facinorosissimis sicariis esse oppressam videretis?

id. Sest. 38, 81; id. Rosc. Am. 31, 86; id. Verr. 2, 1, 10, §§ 28 and 29.—

With pluperf. subj.:

quod esset judicium cum de Verris turpissimo comitatu tres recuperatorum nomine adsedissent?

Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 12, § 30:

mors cum exstinxisset invidiam, res ejus gestae sempiterni nominis glorianiterentur,

id. Balb. 6, 16.

cum (archaic form COM, found in an inscr., COM PREIVATVD; in MSS. sometimes quom or quum), prep. with abl. [for skom, Sanscr. root sak, together; cf. sequor, and Gr. koinos, sun], designates in gen. accompaniment, community, connection of one object with another (opp. sine, separatim, etc.), with, together, together with, in connection or company with, along with; sometimes also to be translated and.

In gen., Plaut. Am. prol. 95:

qui cum Amphitruone abiit hinc in exercitum,

id. ib. prol. 125:

cum Pansā vixi in Pompeiano,

Cic. Att. 14, 20, 4:

semper ille antea cum uxore, tum sine eā,

id. Mil. 21, 55:

quibuscum essem libenter,

id. Fam. 5, 21, 1; cf.:

cum quibus in ceteris intellegis afuisse,

id. Sull. 3, 7:

si cenas hodie mecum,

Hor. Ep. 1, 7, 70:

vagamur egentes cum conjugibus et liberis,

Cic. Att. 8, 2, 3:

errare malo cum Platone, etc.,

id. Tusc. 1, 17, 39:

qui unum imperium unumque magistratum cum ipsis habeant,

Caes. B. G. 2, 3 et saep.—

In an expression of displeasure:

in' hinc, quo dignus, cum donis tuis Tam lepidis,

Ter. Eun. 4, 3, 9; cf. Plaut. Most. 2, 2, 33; Ter. And. 5, 4, 38; id. Eun. 1, 2, 73; id. Heaut. 4, 6, 7 al.—

In a designation of time with which some action concurs:

egone abs te abii hinc hodie cum diluculo?

Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 121; so,

cum primo luci,

id. Cist. 2, 1, 58:

cras cum filio cum primo luci ibo hinc,

Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 55; Cic. Off. 3, 31, 112; cf.:

cum primā luce,

id. Att. 4, 3, 4; and:

cum primo lumine solis,

Verg. A. 7, 130: cum primo mane, Auct. B. Afr. 62: cum mane, Lucil. ap. Diom. p. 372 P:

pariter cum ortu solis,

Sall. J. 106, 5:

pariter cum occasu solis,

id. ib. 68, 2; cf.:

cum sole reliquit,

Verg. A. 3, 568 et saep.:

mane cum luci simul,

Plaut. Merc. 2, 1, 31; v. simul: exiit cum nuntio (i. e. at the same time with, etc.), Caes. B. G. 5, 46; cf.: cum his nuntius Romam ad consulendum redit ( = hama toisde), Liv. 1, 32, 10:

simul cum dono designavit templo Jovis fines,

id. 1, 10, 5; cf.:

et vixisse cum re publicā pariter, et cum illā simul extinctus esse videatur,

Cic. de Or. 3, 3, 10.—

In designating the relations, circumstances, way, and manner with which any act is connected, by which it is accompanied, under or in which it takes place, etc., with, in, under, in the midst of, among, to, at: aliquid cum malo suo facere, Plaut. Bacch. 3, 4, 4; cf.:

cum magnā calamitate et prope pernicie civitatis,

Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 24, § 63:

cum summā rei publicae salute et cum tuā peste ac pernicie cumque eorum exitio, qui, etc.,

id. Cat. 1, 13, 33:

cum magno provinciae periculo,

Caes. B. G. 1, 10:

cum summo probro,

Ter. And. 5, 3, 10: cum summo terrore hominum, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24, 6:

cum summā tuā dignitate,

Cic. Fin. 4, 22, 61:

cum bonā alite,

Cat. 61, 19:

ferendum hoc onus est cum labore,

Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 21; cf. Cic. N. D. 2, 23, 59:

multis cum lacrimis aliquem obsecrare,

amid many tears, Caes. B. G. 1, 20; cf.:

hunc ipsum abstulit magno cum gemitu civitatis,

Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 19, § 49:

orare cum lacrimis coepere,

Liv. 5, 30, 5:

si minus cum curā aut cautelā locus loquendi lectus est,

Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 6 Ritschl; so,

cum curā,

Cic. Inv. 1, 39, 70; Sall. J. 54, 1; Liv. 22, 42, 5 et saep.; cf.:

cum summo studio,

Sall. C. 51, 38:

cum quanto studio periculoque,

Liv. 8, 25, 12 al.:

cum multā venustate et omni sale,

Cic. Fin. 1, 3, 9:

summā cum celeritate ad exercitum rediit,

Hirt. B. G. 8, 52:

maximo cum clamore involant,

Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 89:

cum clamore,

Liv. 2, 23, 8; 5, 45, 2:

cum clamore ac tumultu,

id. 9, 31, 8; cf.:

Athenienses cum silentio auditi sunt,

id. 38, 10, 4; 7, 35, 1:

illud cum pace agemus,

Cic. Tusc. 5, 29, 83:

cum bonā pace,

Liv. 1, 24, 3; 21, 24, 5:

cum bonā gratiā,

Cic. Fat. 4, 7:

cum bonā veniā,

Liv. 29, 1, 7; cf.:

cum veniā,

Ov. Tr. 4, 1, 104; Quint. 10, 1, 72:

cum virtute vivere,

Cic. Fin. 3, 8, 29; cf. id. ib. 2, 11, 34:

cum judicio,

Quint. 10, 1, 8:

cum firmā memoriā,

id. 5, 10, 54:

legata cum fide ac sine calumniā persolvere,

Suet. Calig. 16:

spolia in aede... cum sollemni dedicatione dono fixit,

Liv. 4, 20, 3.—

Attributively, with subst.:

et huic proelium cum Tuscis ad Janiculum erat crimini,

Liv. 2, 52, 7 Weissenb. ad loc.:

frumenti cum summā caritate inopia erat,

id. 2, 12, 1; 2, 5, 2; 7, 29, 3.—

Cum eo quod, ut, or ne (in an amplification or limitation), with the circumstance or in the regard that, on or under the condition, with the exception, that, etc. (except once in Cic. epistt. not ante-Aug.).

Cum eo quod, with indic., Quint. 12, 10, 47 Spald.; 10, 7, 13; so,

cum eo quidem, quod, etc.,

id. 2, 4, 30. —With subj.:

sit sane, quoniam ita tu vis: sed tamen cum eo, credo, quod sine peccato meo fiat,

Cic. Att. 6, 1, 7.—

With ut:

Antium nova colonia missa cum eo, ut Antiatibus permitteretur, si et ipsi adscribi coloni vellent,

Liv. 8, 14, 8; so id. 8, 14, 2; 30, 10, 21; 36, 5, 3; Cels. 3, 22.—So with tamen:

cum eo tamen, ut nullo tempore is... non sit sustinendus,

Cels. 3, 5 fin.; 4, 6 fin. —

With ne:

obsequar voluntati tuae cum eo, ne dubites, etc.,

Col. 5, 1, 4:

cum eo, ne amplius quam has urant,

Cels. 7, 22; and with tamen:

cum eo tamen, ne, etc.,

id. 2, 17.—

Cum dis volentibus, etc., with God's help, by the will of the gods, sun theôi:

cum divis volentibus quodque bene eveniat mando tibi, Mani, etc.,

Cato, R. R. 141, 1: volentibu' cum magnis dis, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 12, 38:

agite, cum dis bene juvantibus arma capite,

Liv. 21, 43, 7; so,

cum superis,

Claud. Cons. Stil. III. p. 174.—

Cum with an ordinal number (cum octavo, cum decimo, etc.) for our - fold, in economical lang., of the multiplication of cultivated products:

ut ex eodem semine aliubi cum decimo redeat, aliubi cum quinto decimo,

ten-, fifteenfold, Varr. R. R. 1, 44, 1; so,

cum octavo, cum decimo,

Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 47, § 112:

cum centesimo,

Plin. 18, 10, 21, § 95; cf. with a subst.:

cum centesimā fruge agricolis faenus reddente terrā,

id. 5, 4, 3, § 24.—

With a means or instrument, considered as attending or accompanying the actor in his action (so most freq. anteclass., or in the poets and scientific writers): acribus inter se cum armis confligere, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 261, 6: effundit voces proprio cum pectore, Enn. ap. Serv. ad Verg. G. 2, 424: cum voce maximā conclamat, Claud. Quadrig. ap. Gell. 9, 13, 10:

cum linguā lingere,

Cat. 98, 3:

cum suo gurgite accepit venientem (fluvius),

Verg. A. 9, 816:

cum vino et oleo ungere,

Veg. 1, 11, 8 et saep.:

terra in Augurum libris scripta cum R uno,

Varr. L. L. 5, § 21 Müll.

In partic.

Completing the meaning of verbs.

With verbs of union, connection, and agreement: cum veteribus copiis se conjungere, Caes. B. G. 1, 37:

ut proprie cohaereat cum narratione,

Auct. Her. 1, 7, 11:

(haec) arbitror mihi constare cum ceteris scriptoribus,

id. 1, 9, 16:

interfectam esse... convenit mihi cum adversariis,

id. 1, 10, 17; cf. Cic. Inv. 1, 22, 31:

quī autem poterat in gratiam redire cum Oppianico Cluentius?

id. Clu. 31, 86:

hanc sententiam cum virtute congruere semper,

id. Off. 3, 3, 13:

foedera quibus etiam cum hoste devincitur fides,

id. ib. 3, 31, 111:

capita nominis Latini stare ac sentire cum rege videbant,

Liv. 1, 52, 4:

cum aliquo in gratiam redire,

id. 3, 58, 4:

stabat cum eo senatūs majestas,

id. 8, 34, 1:

conjurasse cum Pausaniā,

Curt. 7, 1, 6:

Autronium secum facere,

Cic. Sull. 13, 36; cf. also conecto, colligo, consentio, compono, etc.—

Of companionship, association, sharing, etc.:

cum his me oblecto, qui res gestas aut orationes scripserunt suas,

Cic. de Or. 2, 14, 61:

quoniam vivitur, non cum perfectis hominibus, sed cum iis, etc.,

id. Off. 1, 15, 46:

nulla (societas) carior quam ea quae cum re publicā est unicuique nostrum,

id. ib. 1, 17, 51:

cum civibus vivere,

id. ib. 1, 34, 124:

cum M. Fabio mihi summus usus est,

id. Fam. 9, 25, 2; cf.:

cum quibus publice privatimque hospitia amicitiasque junxerant,

Liv. 1, 45, 2:

partiri cum Dinaeā matre jussit,

Cic. Clu. 7, 21:

cum Baebio communicare,

id. ib. 16, 47; cf.

of local association, nearness: cum mortuā jugulatum servum nudum positurum ait,

Liv. 1, 58, 4:

duos tamen pudor cum eo tenuit,

id. 2, 10, 5.—

Of intercourse, traffic, etc.:

cum aliquo agere,

to deal with, Cic. Ac. 2, 35, 112; Caes. B. G. 1, 13:

cum eo Accius injuriarum agit,

Auct. Her. 1, 14, 24:

si par est agere cum civibus,

Cic. Off. 2, 23, 83; 3, 22, 88; id. Scaur. 10, 20; cf. id. Fam. 5, 18, 1; Liv. 1, 19, 7; 3, 9, 13; 4, 15, 2; Val. Max. 4, 3, 8:

si mihi cum Peripateticis res esset,

Cic. Ac. 2, 35, 112:

tecum enim mihi res est,

id. Rosc. Am. 30, 84:

uni tibi et cum singulis res est,

Liv. 2, 12, 11:

pacem cum Sabinis facere,

Cic. Off. 3, 30, 109.—Esp.: agere cum aliquo, to have a lawsuit with, Gai Inst. 4, 87; 4, 114 et saep.; v. ago, II. B. 8. a., and II. B. 9.; consisto, I. B. 5.; cf. also pango, etc.—

Of deliberation and discussion:

haec ego cum ipsis philosophis disserebam,

Cic. de Or. 1, 13, 57:

tempus cum conjuratis consultando absumunt,

Liv. 2, 4, 3 et saep.; v. also cogito, reputo, dubito, etc.—

Of strife, difference, etc.:

quibuscum continenter bellum gerunt,

Caes. B. G. 1, 1:

cum Cleanthe quam multis rebus Chrysippus dissidet!

Cic. Ac. 2, 47, 143:

neque tam quererer cum deo quod, etc.,

id. ib. 2, 25, 81:

cum quo Antiochum saepe disputantem audiebam,

id. ib. 2, 4, 11:

cum stomacheretur cum Metello,

id. Or. 2, 66, 267:

manu cum hoste confligere,

id. Off. 1, 23, 81:

utilia cum honestis pugnare,

id. ib. 3, 7, 34: cum Catone dissentire. id. ib. 3, 22, 88:

cum majoribus nostris bella gessit,

id. Scaur. 19, 45; Liv. 1, 35, 7; 7, 22, 4:

cum Auruncis bellum inire,

id. 2, 16, 8; cf.:

cum Volscis aequo Marte discessum est,

id. 2, 40, 14:

inimicitias cum Africano gerere,

Val. Max. 4, 1, 8; Sen. Vit. Beat. 2, 3:

cum Scipione dissentire,

Val. Max. 4, 1, 12:

cum utrāque (uxore) divortium fecit,

Suet. Claud. 26; cf. also certo, pugno, discrepo, differo, distraho, dissentio, etc.—

Of comparison:

nec Arcesilae calumnia conferenda est cum Democriti verecundiā,

Cic. Ac. 2, 5, 14:

hanc rationem dicendi cum imperatoris laude comparare,

id. de Or. 1, 2, 8:

conferam Sullamne cum Junio,

id. Clu. 34, 94:

(orationem) cum magnitudine utilitatis comparare,

id. Off. 2, 6, 20.—

Pregn., implying the notion of being furnished, endowed, clothed with any thing, or of possessing, holding, suffering under, etc., in a lit. and trop. sense: ille vir haud magnā cum re sed plenus fidei, Enn. ap. Cic. Sen. 1, 1 (cf. the antith.:

hominem sine re, sine fide,

Cic. Cael. 32, 78):

a portu illuc nunc cum laternā advenit,

Plaut. Am. prol. 149:

cadus cum vino,

id. Stich. 5, 1, 7; cf. id. Pers. 2, 3, 15:

olla cum aquā,

Cato, R. R. 156:

arcula cum ornamentis,

Plaut. Most. 1, 3, 91:

fiscos cum pecuniā Siciliensi,

Cic. Verr. 1, 8, 22:

onerariae naves cum commeatu,

Liv. 30, 24, 5 et saep.:

cum servili schemā,

Plaut. Am. prol. 117;

so of clothing,

id. Rud. 1, 4, 31; Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 24, § 54; 2, 5, 13, § 31; [p. 490] id. Rab. Post. 10, 27; Liv. 35, 34, 7; Suet. Claud. 13; Sil. 1, 94 et saep.:

ut ne quis cum telo servus esset,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 3, § 7;

so of weapons,

id. Phil. 2, 8, 19; cf.:

inmissi cum falcibus, etc.,

id. Tusc. 5, 23, 65:

vidi argenteum Cupidinem cum lampade,

holding, id. Verr. 2, 2, 47, § 115:

simulacrum Cereris cum faucibus,

id. ib. 2, 4, 49, §

109: cum elephanti capite puer natus,

Liv. 27, 11, 5; cf.:

cum quinque pedibus natus,

id. 30, 2, 10; 33, 1, 11; 27, 4, 14 al.: omnia cum pulchris animis Romana juventus, Enn. ap. Don. ad Ter. Phorm. 3, 1, 1; cf.

Ter. ib.: Minucius cum vulnere gravi relatus in castra,

Liv. 9, 44, 14:

te Romam venisse cum febri,

Cic. Att. 6, 9, 1; so id. de Or. 3, 2, 6; id. Clu. 62, 175: cum eisdem suis vitiis nobilissimus, with all his faults, i. e. in spite of, id. ib. 40, 112:

ex eis qui cum imperio sint,

id. Fam. 1, 1, 3 Manut.; cf.:

cum imperio aut magistratu,

Suet. Tib. 12 Bremi; v. imperium.—

With idem (never of the identity of two subjects, but freq. of the relation of two subjects to the same object, etc.;

v. Krebs, Antibarb. p. 538): tibi mecum in eodem est pistrino vivendum,

Cic. de Or. 2, 33, 144:

quandoque tu... omnibus in eisdem flagitiis mecum versatus es,

id. Verr. 2, 3, 80, § 187:

Numidae... in eādem mecum Africā geniti,

Liv. 30, 12, 15; 28, 28, 14; Tac. A. 15, 2; Val. Max. 6, 5, 3.—

In the adverb. phrase, cum primis, with the foremost, i.e. especially, particularly (rare), Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 28, § 68; id. Brut. 62, 224.—Post-class. also as one word: cumprīmis, Gell. 1, 12, 7 al.

Cum in anastrophe. So always with the pers. pron.: mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, etc.; cf. Cic. Or. 45, 154; Prisc. pp. 949 and 988 P.; and in gen. with the rel. pron.:

quocum (quīcum), quacum, quibuscum, quīcum (for quocum),

Cic. Or. 45, 154; Liv. 38, 9, 2; Cic. Att. 5, 1, 4; id. Verr. 2, 2, 31, §§ 76 and 77; Caes. B. G. 1, 8; Cic. Rep. 1, 10, 15; id. Att. 4, 9, 2; id. Off. 1, 35, 126; Quint. 8, 6, 65; 10, 5, 7; 11, 2, 38. But where cum is emphatic, or a demonstrative pron. is understood, cum is placed before the rel.; cf.:

his de rebus velim cum Pompeio, cum Camillo, cum quibus vobis videbitur, consideretis,

Cic. Fam. 14, 14, 3:

adhibuit sibi quindecim principes cum quibus causas cognovit,

id. Off. 2, 23, 82; Liv. 1, 45, 2.—

Before et... et, connecting two substt.:

cum et diurno et nocturno metu,

Cic. Tusc. 5, 23, 66.

In compounds the primitive form com was alone in use, and was unchanged before b, p, m: comburo, compono, committo, and a few words beginning with vowels: comes, comitium, and comitor; m was assimilated before r: corripio; often before l: colligo or conligo; rarely before n, as connumero, but usually dropped: conecto, conitor, conubium; with the change of m into n before all the remaining consonants: concutio, condono, confero, congero, conqueror, consumo, contero, convinco; so, conjicio, etc., but more usually conicio; and with the rejection of m before vowels and before h: coarguo, coëo, coinquino, coopto, cohibeo.—

It designates,

A being or bringing together of several objects: coëo, colloquor, convivor, etc.: colligo, compono, condo, etc.—

The completeness, perfecting of any act, and thus gives intensity to the signif. of the simple word, as in commaculo, commendo, concito, etc., comminuo, concerpo, concido, convello, etc.

Cum (ante-class. quom; freq. in MSS. of Cicero; the post-class. form quum is incorrectly given in many MSS. and edd.), conj. [pronom. stem ka- or kva- with acc. case ending].

Of time, when, as, while, sometimes = after, since.

In adverbial clauses dependent on non-preterite predicates.

The time designated by cum being indefinite, when, if, whenever, always with indic., except in the instances A. 2.

Cum with pres. indic., often equivalent to si.

With principal predicate in pres.:

nam omnes id faciunt quom se amari intellegunt,

Plaut. Truc. prol. 17:

facile, quom valemus, recta consilia aegrotis damus,

Ter. And. 2, 1, 9; Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 44; id. Poen. 4, 2, 20; id. Truc. 1, 1, 46; Ter. Phorm. 2, 1, 11:

cum semen maturum habet, tum tempestiva est,

Cato, R. R. 17; 41: quid? tum cum es iratus, permittis illi iracundiae dominationem animi tui? Cic. Rep. 1, 38, 59:

cum permagna praemia sunt, est causa peccandi,

id. Off. 3, 20, 79; id. de Or. 3, 23, 87:

quidam vivere tunc incipiunt cum desinendum est,

Sen. Ep. 23, 11.—

With principal predicate in fut. (rare):

ad cujus igitur fidem confugiet cum per ejus fidem laeditur cui se commiserit?

Cic. Rosc. Am. 40, 116; id. Leg. 3, 10, 24; id. Fl. 17, 40; Verg. A. 12, 208.—

With principal predicate in logical perf. (mostly poet.):

haud invito ad auris sermo mi accessit tuos, Quom te postputasse omnis res prae parente intellego,

Ter. Hec. 3, 5, 33:

qui cum levati morbo videntur, in eum de integro inciderunt,

Cic. Fam. 12, 30, 2:

(dolor) Cum furit... Profuit incensos aestus avertere ( = prodest),

Verg. G. 3, 457:

nemo non, cum alteri prodest, sibi profuit,

Sen. Ep. 81, 19; Cic. Att. 4, 18, 1; Liv. 8, 8, 11; Verg. A. 9, 435; id. G. 1, 288.—

With logical perf. indic.

With principal predicate in pres. (very freq.), the perf. translated either by English pres. perf. or by pres.: omnia sunt incerta cum a jure discessum est, when we ( once) disregard the law, Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 1:

gubernatores cum exultantes loligines viderunt... tempestatem significari putant,

id. Div. 2, 70, 145:

cum depulsi sunt agni a matribus, diligentia adhibenda est ne, etc.,

Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17:

cum ejus generis copia defecit, ad innocentium supplicia descendunt,

Caes. B. G. 6, 16, 5:

(hostis) cum intravit... modum a captivis non accipit,

Sen. Ira, 1, 8, 2:

quia enim, cum prima cognovi, jungere extrema cupio,

Plin. Ep. 7, 10, 1; Cic. Or. 1, 33, 153; id. Div. 2, 26, 56; id. Brut. 24, 93; id. Cat. 4, 6, 12; id. Fam. 6, 3, 3; Auct. Her. 4, 50, 63; Caes. B. G. 4, 33; 5, 21; Liv. 22, 9, 8; 34, 31, 4; Val. Max. 8, 10 prooem.; 9, 6 init.; Sen. Ep. 3, 2; 21, 9; id. Cons. Helv. 13, 2; Curt. 3, 3, 18; Plin. 18, 7, 10, § 60; Quint. 4, 2, 122; 10, 7, 14.—In oblique clauses the perf. indic. may remain, or may be changed into perf. subj., even after preterites, Cic. Off. 1, 28, 26; 2, 20, 69.—

With principal predicate in fut. ( poet.), Ov. P. 1, 5, 47.—

With two logical perff. (rare):

cum id factum est, tamen grex dominum non mutavit,

Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 6:

quae cum se disposuit... summum bonum tetigit,

Sen. Vit. Beat. 8, 5; id. Tranq. 17, 11; id. Ben. 1, 1, 5. —

With fut.

With principal predicate in fut.:

ita fere officia reperientur, cum quaeretur, quid deceat, etc.,

Cic. Off. 1, 34, 125; Auct. Her. 2, 7, 10; 2, 12, 17.— So with principal predicate in fut. imper:

etiam tum cum verisimile erit aliquem commisisse... latratote,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 20, 57, id. Mur. 31, 65; id. Att. 3, 8, 4; Liv. 35, 19, 6.—

With principal predicate in pres.:

in talibus... stabilitas amicitiae confirmari potest, cum homines cupiditatibus imperabunt,

Cic. Lael. 22, 82; Val. Max. 4, 8 prooem.—

With fut. perf.

With principal predicate in pres.:

quam (spem), cum in otium venerimus, habere volumus,

Cic. Att. 1, 7:

nec irascimur illis cum sessorem recusaverint,

Sen. Const. 12, 3; id. Cons. Marc. 7, 2.—

With principal predicate in fut. indic.:

cum haec erunt considerata, statim nostrae legis expositione... utemur,

Auct. Her. 2, 10, 15:

cum viderit secari patrem suum filiumve, vir bonus non flebit?

Sen. Ira, 1, 12, 1.—In oblique clauses, dependent on preterites, it is changed to the pluperf. subj.:

qui tum demum beatum terrarum orbem futurum praedicavit cum aut sapientes regnare, aut reges sapere coepissent,

Val. Max. 7, 2, ext. 4.—

With principal predicate in fut. imper.:

cum tempestates pluviae fuerint, videtote quot dies, etc.,

Cato, R. R. 2, 3; 25 init.; 38.—

With two fut. perff.:

cum bene cesserit negotiatio, multum militia retulerit,

Sen. Cons. Helv. 10, 6.—

In partic.

In definitions with pres, indic.:

humile genus est (causae) cum contempta res adfertur,

Auct. Her. 1, 3, 5:

purgatio est cum factum conceditur, culpa removetur,

Cic. Inv. 1, 11, 15: maxima est capitis deminutio cum aliquis simul et civitatem et libertatem amittit, Gai Inst. 1, 160; Auct. Her. 1, 46; 2, 4, 6; 4, 12, 17; 4, 53, 66 et saep. —

Etiam cum (less freq. cum etiam), even when (nearly = etiamsi), always with indic. if dependent on other than preterite predicates. (1) With pres.: qui cavet ne decipiatur, vix cavet, quom etiam cavet, Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 5:

in quo scelere, etiam cum multae causae convenisse... videntur, tamen non temere creditur,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 22, 62:

qui incolunt maritimas urbis, etiam cum manent corpore, animo tamen excursant,

id. Rep. 2, 4, 7; Curt. 6, 3, 10; Plin. Ep. 1, 8, 6.—(2) With fut.:

etiam cum potentes nocere intendent,

Sen. Const. 4, 1. —(3) With fut. perf.:

cum etiam plus contenderimus, etc.,

Cic. Fam. 1, 8, 7; Sen. Ben. 4, 13, 3.—(4) In oblique clauses with imperf. subj., Cic. Fragm. Tog. Cand. 15.—

Anteclass. with indic. in addressing indefinite persons in rules, after imper.:

sorba in sapa cum vis condere, arida facias,

Cato, R. R. 7 fin. — Always with indic. if a certain person is addressed; cf. Cic. Rep. 1, 38, 59 (l. A. 1. a. a supra); id. Verr. 2, 1, 18, § 47.—

With subj. referring to indefinite time.

With the 2d pers. sing., used in an indefinite sense ( you = one, any one).

With pres. subj.:

acerbum'st pro benefactis quom mali messim metas,

Plaut. Ep. 5, 2, 53:

quom faciem videas, videtur esse quantivis preti,

Ter. And. 5, 2, 15; Plaut. Cas. 3, 2, 32; id. Bacch. 3, 3, 38; id. Merc. 3, 2, 7 and 8 et saep.:

difficile est tacere cum doleas,

Cic. Sull. 10, 31:

etiam interpretatio nominis habet acumen cum ad ridiculum convertas,

id. de Or. 2, 63, 257; 2, 64, 259; 2, 67, 269; 2, 75, 305; 3, 38, 156; Sen. Ep. 75, 4 et saep.—

With perf. subj.:

difficile est cum praestare omnibus concupieris, servare aequitatem,

Cic. Off. 1, 19, 64:

quos (versus) cum cantu spoliaveris, nuda paene remanet oratio,

id. Or. 55, 183; id. Lael. 21, 77; id. Inv. 1, 47, 88; Sall. C. 12, 3; 51, 24; 58, 16.—

In the jurists, in a clause exemplifying a general rule: cum ergo ita scriptum sit Heres Titius esto, addicere debemus, Gai Inst. 2, 165; so id. ib. 4, 97; 3, 161; Auct. Her. 4, 31, 42.—

In the phrase audio cum dicat (I. F. 1, b. infra):

saepe soleo audire Roscium cum ita dicat se, etc.,

Cic. de Or. 2, 28, 129.—

When, after cum, an imperfect or pluperfect is used as a logical tense (post-Aug.): non tulit gratis qui cum rogasset accepit, who has asked for the favor, and, etc., Sen. Ben. 2, 1, 4; 2, 3, 1; 2, 13, 2; id. Ep. 86, 8.—

If the principal predicate is a potential subjunctive, an indefinite clause with a present or future after cum is always in the same mood:

caveto quom ventus siet aut imber, effodias aut seras,

Cato, R. R. 28:

quis tam dissoluto animo est qui, haec cum videat, tacere ac neglegere possit?

Cic. Rosc. Am. 11, 32; id. Planc. 39, 94; id. Clu. 55, 153; id. Inv. 1, 4, 87; 1, 51, 95; Auct. Her. 4, 6, 9; 4, 32, 43.—

Of definite time, always with indic. (for exceptions, v. 4. infra), when, if, while (for the distinction between cum and si, cf.:

formam mihi totius rei publicae, si jam es Romae, aut cum eris, velim mittas,

Cic. Att. 6, 3, 4:

quae si prodierit, atque adeo cum prodierit—scio enim proditurum esse—audiet,

id. Rosc. Am. 25, 100:

si damnatus eris, atque adeo cum damnatus eris—nam dubitatio quae poterit esse? etc.,

id. Verr. 2, 3, 29, § 70; id. Or. 2, 75, 304; Sen. Ep. 83, 10).

Cum with pres. indic.

Principal predicate in pres.:

certe, edepol, quom illum contemplo et formam cognosco meam... nimis simili'st mei,

Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 288; so id. Poen. 1, 2, 71; id. Pers. 4, 4, 15; Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 45: Py. Ne fle. Ph. Non queo Quom te video, Plaut. Mil. 4, 8, 14; id. Am. 1, 1, 260; id. Rud. 3, 4, 38:

potestne tibi ulla spes salutis ostendi cum recordaris in deos immortalis quam impius... fueris?

Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 18, § 47: cum hoc vereor, et cupio tibi... parcere, rursus immuto voluntatem meam ( = while), id. Rosc. Am. 34, 95; Serv. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5, 4:

equidem cum... recordor, vix aetatem Alexandri suffecturam fuisse reor ad unum bellum,

Liv. 9, 19, 12; Cic. Planc. 12, 29; id. Clu. 10, 29; Liv. 40, 46, 3:

quod cum ita est,

if this is so, Quint. 24, 58 (cf.:

quodsi ita est,

Cic. Mur. 2, 5); so,

often, nunc cum: qui modo nusquam conparebas, nunc quom conpares, peris,

Plaut. Aul. 4, 4, 2; so id. ib. 1, 3, 35; 2, 2, 17; id. As. 1, 2, 18; Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 39:

nos de injusto rege nihil loquimur, nunc cum de ipsa regali re publica quaerimus,

Cic. Rep. 3, 35, 47; Liv. 44, 39, 7.—So with logical perf. for the pres., Quint. 4, 2, 122.—But Cicero always uses nunc cum with a subj. when the clause, while designating present time, generally [p. 491] in opposition to a former time, implies a reason for the principal action, now that:

quodsi tum, cum res publica severitatem desiderabat, vici naturam, etc., nunc cum omnes me causae ad misericordiam... vocent, quanto tandem studio, etc.,

Cic. Mur. 2, 3, 6; id. Fam. 9, 16, 7; id. Font. 15, 35 (25); id. Imp. Pomp. 10, 27; 17, 50; not found in later writers, except in the Gallic panegyrists, e. g. Eum. Grat. Act. 2 init. —

With principal predicate in the logical perf., if (ante-class.):

Curculio hercle verba mihi dedit quom cogito,

Plaut. Curc. 4, 4, 27:

sed tandem, quom recogito, qui potis est scire, haec scire me?

id. Stich. 2, 1, 29; id. Mil. 4, 8, 64.—

Cum with logical perf. indic.

Principal predicate in pres.:

ergo quom optume fecisti, nunc adest occasio Benefacta cumulare,

after doing excellently, Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 63: quo etiam major vir habendus est (Numa), cum illam sapientiam constituendae civitatis duobus prope saeculis ante cognovit, quam, etc. ( = siquidem, if he has; seeing that he has), Cic. de Or. 2, 37, 154; Verg. A. 9, 249.—

With principal predicate in fut. ( poet.):

at cumst imposta corona, Clamabis capiti vina subisse meo (est imposta = erit imposta),

Prop. 4 (5), 2, 30.—

With fut.

With principal predicate in fut.:

quom videbis tum scies,

Plaut. Bacch. 1, 2, 37; id. Am. 3, 3, 15; id. Men. 5, 7, 7; Ter. Phorm. 1, 2, 82; id. Heaut. prol. 33:

sed cum certum sciam faciam te paulo ante certiorem,

Cic. Fam. 9, 23; 3, 11, 3; 12, 30, 5; 14, 3, 4; id. Q. Fr. 3, 8, 2; Liv. 3, 53, 10.—

With principal predicate in fut. perf.:

cum tu haec leges, ego jam annuum munus confecero,

Cic. Fam. 2, 12, 1.—

With principal predicate in imper. fut.:

mox quom imitabor Sauream, caveto ne succenseas,

Plaut. As. 2, 2, 105; id. Mil. 3, 3, 59.—

With principal predicate in subj. (potential):

cum testes ex Sicilia dabo, quem volet ille eligat,

Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 22, § 48; id. Off. 1, 34, 122; 3, 10, 46; id. Att. 4, 9, 1; 4, 10, 2; 4, 17, 1 et saep.—

In oblique clauses, after preterites, changed into imperf. subj., Caes. B. C. 2, 40; after other tenses it is either changed into pres. subj. or remains unchanged, Cic. Fam. 1, 56, 2; 1, 7, 4; Sall. C. 58, 8.—

With fut. perf.

With principal predicate in fut.:

mox dabo quom ab re divina rediero,

Plaut. Poen. 1, 2, 193; id. Am. 1, 1, 43; 1, 2, 4; Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 8:

cum haec docuero, tum illud ostendam, etc.,

Cic. Clu. 4, 9; id. Verr. 2, 1, 1, § 3; id. de Or. 2, 33, 143; 2, 59, 239; id. Att. 3, 23, 5 et saep.—In oblique clauses, after preterites, the fut. perf. is changed into pluperf. subj., Cic. Rosc. Am. 10, 28; 28, 78; Liv. 1, 56, 11; 5, 30, 1; after other tenses, and often in oblique oration, it remains unchanged, or is changed into perf. subj., Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 71, § 183; id. Fam. 2, 5, 2 dub.; Liv. 21, 13, 8; 3, 56, 10.—

With principal predicate in imper. (almost always fut. imper.):

quod quom dixero, si placuerit, Facitote,

Ter. Eun. 5, 8, 37:

cum ego Granium testem produxero, refellito, si poteris,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 59, § 154; id. Marcell. 9, 27; id. Fam. 16, 4, 3; Tac. A. 1, 22.—With pres. imper., Liv. 24, 38, 7.—

With principal predicate in subj. (potential):

quae cum omnia collegeris, tum ipse velim judices satisne videatur,

Cic. Fam. 5, 2, 4; id. Or. 13, 41 dub.—In oblique clauses, after non-preterites, the fut. perf. remains unchanged:

oro, ne me hodie, cum isti respondero, putetis, etc.,

Cic. Phil. 2, 5, 10; id. Clu. 2, 6.—

With subj. in definite time.

Sometimes in oblique construction (3. c. e; 3. d. a).—

Sometimes by attraction:

curata fac sint quom a foro redeam domum,

Plaut. Aul. 2, 3, 6; 2, 3, 11; id. Stich. 1, 2, 8; id. Curc. 2, 2, 3:

non admirere cum ego ipse me id ex te primum audisse confitear?

Cic. Planc. 24, 58. —

In the semi-causal connection nunc cum, v. 3, a. a fin. supra.

In adverbial anterior clauses dependent on preterite predicates, the time of the cum clause preceding that of the principal sentence (always with subj., except in the instances mentioned 2.; 3. a; and 5.), when, after.

With pluperf. subj. (so generally): quom socios nostros mandisset impius Cyclops, Liv. And. Fragm. ap. Prisc. 8, p. 817 (Lubbert conjectures, without sufficient reason, mandit sex): quom saucius multifariam ibi factus esset, tamen volnus capiti nullum evenit, Cato, Orig. ap. Gell. 3, 7, 19:

portisculus signum cum dare coepisset,

Enn. Ann. v. 234 Vahl.:

quom testamento patris partisset bona,

Afran. Com. Rel. v. 50 Rib.: quem quom ibi vidissent Hortensius Postumiusque, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 4, 32; Enn. Ann. v. 241 Vahl.; Turp. Com. Rel. v. 48 Rib.; Lucil. ap. Non. p. 394, 27 (the MSS. reading:

quom venisset,

Plaut. As. 2, 3, 15, is corrupt):

audivi summos homines cum quaestor ex Macedonia venissem Athenas,

Cic. de Or. 1, 11, 45:

haec cum Crassus dixisset, silentium est consecutum,

id. ib. 1, 35, 160:

cum Thebani Lacedaemonios bello superavissent... aeneum statuerunt tropaeum,

id. Inv. 2, 23, 69:

Dionysius cum fanum Proserpinae Locris expilavisset, navigabat Syracusas,

id. N. D. 3, 34, 83:

eo cum venisset, animadvertit ad alteram ripam magnas esse copias hostium,

Caes. B. G. 5, 18:

Tarquinius et Tullia minor... cum domos vacuas novo matrimonio fecissent, junguntur nuptiis,

Liv. 1, 46, 9 et saep. —

With pluperf. indic.

Ante-class. in place of the class. subj.:

idem me pridem quom ei advorsum veneram, Facere atriensem voluerat,

Plaut. Cas. 2, 8, 28:

Quid ais? Quom intellexeras, id consilium capere, quor non dixti extemplo,

Ter. And. 3, 2, 38.—

If the pluperfect is a virtual imperfect, designating the time at which the main action took place, the principal predicate being likewise in the pluperfect, when the clause would require an indicative if placed in the imperfect (3. a. a): exspectationem nobis non parvam adtuleras cum scripseras Varronem tibi confirmasse, etc. ( = exspectabam cum legebam; cf. C. 3, a. a, 2.), Cic. Att. 3, 18, 1; cf. Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 9, 2, where the cum clause is relative; v. E.: Romae haud minus terroris... erat quam fuerat biennio ante cum castra Punica objecta Romanis moenibus fuerant (C. 3. a. a, 1.), Liv. 27, 44, 1; so id. 5, 28, 1; 26, 40, 17; 44, 10, 1.—

If the clause indicates that the time of the main action is a period, subsequent to that of the action designated by the pluperfect:

nam tum cum in Asia res magnas permulti amiserant, scimus Romae, solutione impedita, fidem concidisse,

Cic. Imp. Pomp. 7, 19:

cum ea consecutus nondum eram... tamen ista vestra nomina numquam sum admiratus,

id. Fam. 3, 7, 5; id. Verr. 2, 5, 69, § 178; id. Inv. 2, 42, 124; Caes. B. G. 7, 35; Liv. 24, 7, 1 sq.; Nep. Dat. 6, 5; Curt. 9, 10, 12; Verg. A. 5, 42.—

If both predicates denote repeated action, the anterior clause with cum has the pluperf. indic. or subj.

With pluperf. indic.

With principal predicate in imperf. indic. (so almost always in Cicero and Caesar; not in the poets, nor in Vell., Val. Max., Tac., Suet., or Plin.), whenever:

cum ad aliquod oppidum venerat, eadem lectica usque ad cubiculum deferebatur,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 11, § 27; 2, 1, 46, § 120; 2, 3, 67, § 156; 2, 4, 61, § 137; 2, 5, 10, § 27; id. Fl. 7, 16; 10, 21; id. Agr. 2, 26, 68; id. Or. 32, 113; id. Brut. 24, 93:

(Cassi vellaunus) cum equitatus noster se in agros ejecerat, essedarios ex silvis emittebat,

Caes. B. G. 5, 19; 3, 14; 3, 15; 4, 7; 5, 35; 7, 22; id. B. C. 1, 58; Sall. J. 92, 8; 44, 4:

cum comminus venerant, gladiis a velitibus trucidabantur,

Liv. 38, 21, 12; Nep. Epam. 3, 6; Sen. Ep. 11, 4; Curt. 3, 10, 8; 3, 10, 11; Quint. 7, 1, 4; Gell. 15, 22, 5; 17, 18, 3; Gai Inst. 4, 15; Pacat. 9.—

With principal predicate in perf. indic.:

Pacuvius qui Syriam usu suam fecit, cum vino... sibi parentaverat,

Sen. Ep. 12, 8; 108, 14.—

With pluperf. subj., an imperf. indic. in principal sentence:

cum fossam latam cubiculari lecto circumdedisset, ejusque transitum... conjunxisset, eum ipse detorquebat,

Cic. Tusc. 5, 20, 59; id. Verr. 2, 3, 41, § 94:

cum cohortes ex acie procucurrissent, Numidae... effugiebant, etc.,

Caes. B. C. 2, 41:

cum in jus duci debitorem vidissent, undique convolabant,

Liv. 2, 27, 8; 25, 3, 11; 5, 48, 2.—

In anterior clauses with imperf. subj.

When the principal clause expresses an immediate consequence ( = pluperf. subj.):

Demaratus cum audiret dominationem Cypseli confirmari, defugit patriam ( = cum audivisset),

Cic. Rep. 2, 19, 34; Caes. B. G. 5, 17 et saep.—

Where both verbs relate to one transaction, especially in remarks and replies:

(Epaminondas) cum gravi vulnere exanimari se videret, quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus, etc.,

Cic. Fin. 2, 30, 97:

cum ex eo quaereretur quid esset dolus magnus, respondebat, etc.,

id. Off. 3. 14, 60; id. Or. 2, 69, 278; id. Rosc. Am. 25, 70; Liv. 3, 71, 4 et saep.—

When the principal action takes place during the action of the dependent clause:

qui cum unum jam et alterum diem desideraretur, neque in eis locis inveniretur... liberti Asuvii in eum invadunt, etc.,

Cic. Clu. 13, 38.—

For the perf. indic. instead of pluperf. subj. v. C. 1. d. infra.

In adverbial clauses of coincident time dependent on preterites ( = eo tempore quo), the clause with cum designating the time at which or during which the main action took place, when, as, while.[The theory of the use of tenses and moods in these clauses is not fully settled. The older grammarians require the indicative if cum denotes pure time, but the subjunctive if denoting cause or relations similar to cause. Zumpt and others acknowledge that the rule is frequently not observed, attributing this to the predilection of the Latin language for the subjunctive. Recently Hoffmann (Zeitpartikeln der Lateinischen Sprache, 1st ed. 1860; 2d ed. 1873) and Lubbert (Syntax von Quom, 1870) have advanced the theory that cum requires the indicative if denoting absolute time, but the subjunctive if denoting relative time. They define absolute time as time co-ordinate or parallel with, or logically independent of, the time of the principal action, which performs the function of a chronological date for the principal action, and they consider it as a criterion that the clause might have constituted an independent sentence; while relative time is logically subordinate to the principal action. Hoffmann condenses his theory in the following words: cum with indicative names and describes the time at which the action of the principal sentence took place; cum with the subjunctive, on the contrary, designates the point of time at which, or the space of time during which, the action expressed in the principal sentence commenced or ended. The chief objections to this theory are: (1) Its vagueness.—(2) The facts that in many instances cum with the subjunctive clearly dates the main action (C. 3. a. b, 2, and 4.; C. 3. a. 5.; C. 3. b. b, 3. and 5.; C. 3. b. g infra); that many of the subjunctive clauses with cum may be transformed into independent sentences (C. 3. b. b, 2. and 3. infra); that many indicative clauses with cum are logically subordinate to the main action (C. 3. a. a, 2. infra), and that when both moods are used in two co-ordinated clauses with cum belonging to the same main sentence, Hoffmann must account for the difference of the moods by explanations not drawn from his theory (Cic. Agr. 2, 64, 64; id. Clu. 30, 83; id. Div. 1, 43, 97; id. Fin. 2, 19, 61; id. de Or. 67, 272; Caes. B. C. 2, 17; Liv. 6, 40, 17; 30, 44, 10).—(3) The impossibility of clearly drawing the line between logical co-ordination and subordination; and the fact that, wherever it is drawn, there will be many passages not accounted for (cf. 1. init. and many passages under C. 3. a. a, 3.; C. 3. a. d; C. 3. b. g, etc.).—(4) That the supposed use of cum with the imperfect indicative is inconsistent with the received doctrine that the imperfect always designates a time relative to another time—a difficulty not satisfactorily met by Hoffman's assumption of an aoristic imperfect.]GENERAL RULE.—The predicate after cum is in the perfect indicative (or historical present) if the action is conceived as a point of time coincident with the time of the main action. It is either in the imperfect indicative or in the imperfect subjunctive if the action is conceived as occupying a period of time within which the main action took place (e. g.:

quid enim meus frater ab arte adjuvari potuit, cum... furem se videre respondit? Quid in omni oratione Crassus... cum pro Cn. Plancio diceret?

Cic. de Or. 2, 54, 220;

where dicebat might stand for diceret, but not responderet for respondit: cum ad tribum Polliam ventum est, et praeco cunctaretur, etc.,

Liv. 29, 37, 8; cf.:

cum tecum Ephesi collocutus sum,

Cic. Fam. 13, 55, 1; and:

cum te Puteolis prosequerer,

id. ib. 3, 10, 8: cum primum lex coepta ferri est, Liv 3, 14, 4; and: cum [p. 492] ferretur lex, id. 5, 30, 4;

also,

Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 1, and Liv. 3, 58, 7).

Both predicates in the perf. indic. (or histor. pres.), both clauses denoting points of time (the principal predicate may be in any verbal form implying a perfect).

The clause expressing a momentary action:

posticulum hoc recepit quom aedis vendidit, Flaut. Trin. 1, 2, 157: scilicet qui dudum tecum venit cum pallam mihi Detulisti,

id. Men. 2, 3, 46; prol. 62; id. Poen. 4, 2, 82; id. Ep. 2, 2, 33; Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 57; id. Heaut. 2, 3, 21 et saep.:

non tum cum emisti fundum Tusculanum, in leporario apri fuerunt,

Varr. R. R. 3, 3, 8:

in judiciis quanta vis esset didicit cum est absolutus,

Cic. Tog. Cand. Fragm. 4:

per tuas statuas vero cum dixit, vehementer risimus,

id. de Or. 2, 59, 242:

cum occiditur Sex. Roscius, (servi) ibidem fuerunt,

id. Rosc. Am. 41, 120; id. Verr. 2, 2, 29, § 70; 1, 4, 11; 2, 2, 66, § 160; 2, 3, 47, § 112; id. Caecin. 29, 85; id. Sest. 55, 157; id. Phil. 2, 9, 21; id. Rep. 6, 22, 24; id. Fam. 9, 15, 2; id. Att. 2, 1, 5 et saep.:

tunc flesse decuit cum adempta sunt nobis arma,

Liv. 3, 55, 10; 10, 6, 8; 28, 42, 14; 42, 46, 1; Vitr. 2, 8, 12; 2, 1, 7; 2, 9, 15;

6, 7, 4: semel dumtaxat vultum mutavit, tunc cum... anulum in profundum dejecit,

Val. Max. 6, 9, 6; 8, 8, ext. 1; 9, 1, ext. 1;

9, 8, 1: rerum natura... cum visum est deinde, (filium tuum) repetiit,

Sen. Cons. Polyb. 10, 4; 11, 2; id. Q. N. 1, 11, 3; 6, 25, 4:

accepimus et serpentem latrasse cum pulsus est regno Tarquinius,

Plin. 8, 41, 63, § 153; 2, 24, 22, § 90; 2, 52, 53, § 139; Suet. Claud. 21; Hor. S. 2, 3, 61; Ov. Tr. 5, 11, 8; Tib. 3, 5, 18; Mart. 5, 49, 9.—So, cum primum, when first, the first time that, as soon as:

jube vinum dari: jam dudum factum'st quom primum bibi,

Plaut. As. 5, 2, 40; id. Cas. prol. 17; Ter. Hec. alt. prol. 31; id. And. prol. 1; id. Eun. 3, 3, 4:

Pompeius cum primum contionem habuit... ostendit, etc.,

Cic. Verr. 1, 15, 45; id. Fam. 2, 9, 1; Liv. 3, 55, 10; 25, 6, 2; 25, 29, 4; 31, 3, 1; 40, 8, 1; 42, 34, 3; Curt. 6, 11, 23; but with imperf. subj. when referring to a per. of time:

ipse cum primum pabuli copia esse inciperet, ad exercitum venit,

Caes. B. G. 2, 2.—In the poets and later writers, the imperf. subj. often occurs where classic prose has the perf. indic.:

effice ut idem status sit cum exigis qui fuit cum promitterem,

Sen. Ben. 4, 39, 4:

tum lacrimare debueras cum equo calcaria subderes,

Curt. 7, 2, 6; Suet. Claud. 6; Ov. P. 4, 12, 28.—

If the clause denotes a state, condition, or action of longer duration, it takes the perf. indic. if asserted as a complete fact without regard to what happened during its progress (virtual point of time):

in quem Juppiter se convertit cum exportavit per mare... Europen,

Varr. R. R. 2, 5, 5:

ne cum in Sicilia quidem (bellum) fuit... pars ejus belli in Italiam ulla pervasit,

Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6:

nempe eo (lituo) Romulus regiones direxit tum cum urbem condidit,

id. Div. 1, 17, 30; id. Verr. 2, 3, 54, § 125; id. Lig. 7, 20; id. Rep. 3, 32, 44:

non tibi, cum in conspectu Roma fuit, succurrit? etc.,

Liv. 2, 40, 7; 34, 3, 7; Nep. Iphicr. 2, 4; id. Pelop. 4, 3.—

With perf. indic., by the time when, before, referring to facts which actually occurred before the action of the principal sentence:

ab Anaximandro moniti Lacedaemonii sunt ut urbem... linquerent, quod terrae motus instaret, tum cum... urbs tota corruit,

Cic. Div. 1, 50, 112; Liv. 22, 36, 4; 34, 31, 15; Prop. 2, 32 (3, 30), 53.—

With perf. indic. when actions in immediate sequence are represented as coincident:

ad quem cum accessimus, Appio, subridens, Recipis nos, inquit, etc.,

Varr. R. R. 3, 2, 2:

me primus dolor percussit, Cotta cum est expulsus,

Cic. Brut. 89, 303:

itaque ne tum quidem cum classem perdidisti, Mamertinis navem imperare ausus es,

id. Verr. 2, 5, 23, § 59:

haec cum facta sunt in concilio, magna spe et laetitia omnium discessum est,

Caes. B. C. 3, 87:

cum Thessalos in armis esse nuntiatum est, Ap. Claudium... senatus misit,

Liv. 42, 5, 8:

Gracchus cum ex Sardinia rediit, orationem ad populum habuit,

Gell. 15, 12, 1; Cic. Imp. Pomp. 1, 2; id. Deiot. 6, 17; id. Top. 16, 61; id. Div. 1, 43, 98; id. Fam. 5, 21, 2; Liv. 4, 44, 10; 4, 60, 8; 9, 25, 2; 22, 14, 12; Nep. Dat. 11, 1; Suet. Caes. 31; Gell. 1, 23, 5; Prop. 3, 20, 37 (4, 21, 7).—Hence a perf. indic. in co-ordination with pluperf. subj.: cum sol nocte visus esset... et cum caelum discessisse visum est (decemviri ad libros ire jussi sunt), Cic. Div. 1, 43, 97.—

With a perf. indic. (or histor. pres.), the principal predicate in imperf.

The action falling within the time of the principal predicate:

set Stalagmus quojus erat tunc nationis, quom hinc abit?

Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 107; id. Rud. 3, 6, 9; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 51:

haec Crassi oratio cum edita est, quattuor et triginta tum habebat annos, etc.,

Cic. Brut. 43, 161:

eo cum venio, praetor quiescebat,

id. Verr. 2, 4, 14, § 32; 2, 5, 69, § 178; id. Fl. 13, 20; id. Pis. 1, 2; id. Lig. 1, 3; id. Phil. 2, 21, 52; 3, 4, 11; id. Fam. 13, 35, 2; id. Att. 6, 1, 13:

cum Caesari in Galliam venit, alterius factionis principes erant Aedui, alterius Sequani,

Caes. B. G. 6, 12; Sall. J. 71, 1:

cum haec accepta clades est, jam C. Horatius et T. Menenius consules erant,

Liv. 2, 51, 1; 21, 39, 4; 23, 49, 5; 28, 27, 14; 34, 16, 6;

45, 39, 1: merito me non adgnoscis, nam cum hoc factum est, integer eram,

Sen. Ben. 5, 24, 3.—Post-class. writers generally use imperf. subj.:

beneficium ei videberis dedisse cui tunc inimicissimus eras cum dares?

Sen. Ben. 5, 19, 7:

bona quoque, quae tunc habuit cum damnaretur, publicabuntur,

Dig. 28, 18, § 1:

pauper Fabricius (erat) Pyrrhi cum sperneret aurum,

Claud. IV. Cons. Hon. 413.—

The action strictly anterior to the principal sentence, rare (1. d.): nam quod conabar cum interventum'st dicere, nunc expedibo, Pac. ap. Non. p. 505, 3 (Trag. Rel. v. 65 Rib.):

cum est ad nos adlatum de temeritate eorum, etc., cetera mihi facillima videbantur... multaque mihi veniebant in mentem, etc.,

Cic. Fam. 3, 10, 1; Sall. C. 51, 32; Verg. A. 6, 515; id. E. 3, 14.—

The predicate after cum conceived as a period or space of time (including repeated action) is either in the imperf. indic. or imperf. subj. [In ante-classical writers and Cicero the imperf. indic. very frequent, and largely prevailing over the subj., except that when the principal predicate denotes a point of time (with perf.), Cicero commonly uses the subj.; the imperf. indic. occurs in Cicero 241 times; in Caesar once with the force of a relativeclause (B. G. 1, 40, 5), and 3 times of repeated action; in Nep. once of repeated action (Att. 9, 6); in Sall. twice (J. 31, 20; id. H. 1, 48, 6 Dietsch); in Liv. 22 times; in Verg. 4 times; in Ovid twice; in Tib. twice; in Prop. 3 times; in Val. Max. twice; then it disappears (except once each in Tac. and Mart.), but reappears in Gaius (3 times), Gellius (twice), and the Gallic panegyrists (several times)].

Both predicates denoting spaces of time, the principal predicate always in the imperf. indic. unless the mood is changed by other influences.

Cum with the imperf. indic. (1) In express or implied opposition to other periods of time, esp. with tum or tunc:

eademne erat haec disciplina tibi quom tu adulescens eras?

Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 17:

alium esse censes nunc me atque olim quom dabam?

Ter. And. 3, 3, 13; Plaut. Capt. 2, 1, 50; id. Most. 1, 3, 64; id. Mil. 2, 2, 26; Ter. And. 1, 1, 69; Enn. ap. Cic. Brut. 19, 76 (Ann. v. 222 Vahl.):

qui cum plures erant, paucis nobis exaequari non poterant, hi postquam pauciores sunt, etc.,

Auct. Her. 4, 18, 25:

qui (Pompeius) cum omnes Caesarem metuebamus ipse eum diligebat, postquam ille metuere coepit, etc.,

Cic. Att. 8, 1, 4:

res per eosdem creditores per quos cum tu aderas agebatur,

id. Fam. 1, 1, 1 (cf.:

Senatus consultum factum est de ambitu in Afranii sententiam quam ego dixeram cum tu adesses,

id. Q. Fr. 2, 9, 3):

Trebellium valde jam diligit: oderat tum cum ille tabulis novis adversabatur,

id. Phil. 6, 4, 11:

non tam id sentiebam cum fruebar, quam tunc cum carebam,

id. Red. Quir. 1, 3:

etenim tunc esset hoc animadvertendum cum classis Syracusis proficiebatur,

id. Verr. 2, 5, 43, § 111 (so 111 times in Cicero, including the instances where the principal predicate is in the perf.):

cum captivis redemptio negabatur, nos vulgo homines laudabant, nunc deteriore condicione sumus, etc.,

Liv. 25, 6, 14; 10, 7, 2; 33, 34, 3; 34, 4, 10; 44, 36, 8; 45, 38, 1; Ov. P. 2, 6, 9; id. M. 13, 473; Val. Max. 6, 3, 1; 4, 1, 10; Mart. 12, 70, 10; Gai Inst. 1, 184; Eum. Grat. Act. 6; cf.: cur eum, cum in consilium iretur, Cluentius et Canutius abesse patiebantur? Cur cum in consilium mittebant, Stajenum judicem qui pecuniam dederant, non requirebant? Cic. Clu. 30, 83 (cum iretur, of the time when the judges retired; cum mittebant, of the previous time, when the parties were asked about the closing of the case; opp. cum iretur).—Poets, even in the class. per., sometimes use the subj. in dependence upon the indic.:

hic subito quantus cum viveret esse solebat, Exit humo,

Ov. M. 13, 441. —(2) The principal predicate denoting a mental act or reflection occasioned by, or accompanying the action of the clause with cum (mostly ante-class. and in Cicero):

desipiebam mentis cum illa scripta mittebam tibi,

Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 35; id. Aul. 2, 2, 1; id. Ps. 1, 5, 86:

sed tu cum et tuos amicos in provinciam quasi in praedam invitabas, et cum eis praedabare, et... non statuebas tibi rationem esse reddendam?

Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 11, § 29:

illas res tantas cum gerebam, non mihi mors, non exsilium ob oculos versabatur?

id. Sest. 21, 47; id. Cat. 3, 1, 3; 3, 7, 16; id. Verr. 2, 2, 10, § 26; 2, 2, 13, § 33; 2, 2, 35, § 86; 2, 3, 86, § 198; 2, 5, 21, § 54; id. Fl. 1, 1; id. Deiot. 1, 3; 8, 23; id. Pis. 24, 56 and 57; id. Ac. 2, 28, 89; id. Or. 13, 41; id. Tusc. 2, 15, 43; id. Fam. 7, 9, 5 (22 times); Sall. H. 1, 48, 6 Dietsch (cf.:

num P. Decius cum se devoveret, et equo admisso in mediam aciem Latinorum inruebat, aliquid... cogitabat?

Cic. Fin. 2, 19, 61; cum se devoveret explains the circumstances of inruebat; hence acc. to 3. a. b, 2. in subj.; cf. Madv. ad loc., who reads devoverat).—(3) If the predicate after cum has a meaning peculiar to the imperf. indic., which by the use of the subj. would be effaced: quod erat os tuum, cum videbas eos homines, quorum ex bonis istum anulus aureus donabas? (descriptive imperf.) Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 80, § 187; so,

fulgentis gladios hostium videbant Decii, cum in aciem eorum inruebant,

id. Tusc. 2, 24, 59: cum de plebe consulem non accipiebat ( = accipere nolebat, conative imperf.), id. Brut. 14, 55:

cum vim quae esset in sensibus explicabamus, etc.,

id. Ac. 2, 12, 37 (the verbum dicendi refers to a certain stage in the discourse, for which Cicero uses the imperf. indic. in independent sentences, e. g. N. D. 3, 29, 71; 3, 6, 15; de Or. 1, 53, 230; 2, 19, 83; 2, 84, 341); so,

equidem... risum vix tenebam, cum Attico Lysiae Catonem nostrum comparabas,

id. Brut. 8, 293:

cum censebam,

id. de Or. 1, 62, 264:

cum dicebam,

id. Fam. 6, 1, 5:

cum ponebas,

id. Fin. 2, 19, 63; so esp. in Cicero's letters the phrase cum haec scribebam = while I am writing this, to preserve the meaning of an epistolary tense, referring to a state, condition, or action in progress at the time of writing the letter:

res, cum haec scribebam, erat in extremum adducta discrimen,

id. Fam. 12, 6, 2; 3, 12, 2; 5, 12, 2; 6, 4, 1; id. Att. 5, 20, 5 et saep.; cum haec scriberem, scripsissem, scripsi, are not epistolary tenses, but refer to events happening after the letter or part of it was finished, = when I wrote, had written, id. ib. 2, 15, 3; 10, 4, 7; 4, 10, 2; id. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 6, § 19; Cael. ap. Cic. Fam. 8, 6, 5; 8, 13, 2;

sometimes cum dabam = cum scribebam,

Cic. Fam. 12, 16, 3 (but cf.:

cum scriberem, as epistolary tense, in oblique discourse,

id. Att. 15, 13, 7).—(4) The coincidence in time of two actions is made emphatic, = eo ipso tempore quo:

tum cum insula Delos... nihil timebat, non modo provinciis sed etiam Appia via jam carebamus,

Cic. Imp. Pomp. 18, 55; id. Phil. 1, 15, 36; 13, 8, 17; id. Sull. 10, 31; id. Tusc. 2, 8, 20; id. Off. 3, 27, 100; id. Dom. 45, 118.—

The predicate after cum is in the imperf. subj. (1) To impart to the clause a causal, adversative or concessive meaning besides the temporal relation:

antea cum equester ordo judicaret, improbi magistratus in provinciis inserviebant publicanis (a logical consequence),

Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 41, § 94:

sed cum jam honores (Hortensii) et illa senior auctoritas gravius quiddam requireret, remanebat idem (dicendi genus) nec decebat idem,

id. Brut. 95, 327; id. Phil. 1, 1, 1; id. Rosc. Am. 15, 42; 16, 45; id. Pis. 10, 2; Liv. 25, 13, 1; 26, 5, 1.—(2) To indicate circumstances under which the main action took place, and by which it is explained:

Flaminius, cum tripudio auspicaretur, pullarius diem differebat, etc.,

Cic. Div. 1, 35, 77: [p. 493] equidem cum peterem magistratum, solebam in prensando dimittere a me Scaevolam, id. de Or. 1, 24, 112; id. Inv. 2, 17, 52; Liv. 41, 1, 2 (cf. 3. b. b, 3.).—(3) To describe the locality of the main action: quom essem in provincia legatus, quam plures ad praetores et consules vinum honorarium dabant, Cato ap. Isid. Orig. 20, 3, 8:

Zenonem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter,

Cic. N. D. 1, 21, 59; 1, 28, 79; id. Tusc. 2, 14, 34; id. Fam. 3, 8, 5; id. Att. 2, 11, 1; 12, 5, 4; 16, 14, 1; id. Verr. 2, 4, 12, § 29; Liv. 5, 54, 3 (cf. 3. b. b, 4.).—(4) To designate the time of the main action as a condition:

cum ageremus vitae supremum diem, scribebamus hoc,

Cic. Fin. 4, 27, 54:

cum jam in exitu annus esset, Q. Marcius... magistratu abiturus erat,

Liv. 39, 23, 1 (cf. 3. b. b, 5.).—

If both the clause with cum and the principal predicate denote repeated action, the predicate with cum in class. prose is in the imperf. indic. or subj. according to the rules under a and b; the principal predicate being always in the imperf. indic.; but in ante-class. writers cum has always the imperf. indic. (1) Imperf. indic.:

tum mi aedes quoque arridebant, quom ad te veniebam, tuae,

Plaut. As. 1, 3, 55; id. Am. 1, 1, 45; id. Rud. 4, 7, 25 sqq.; Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 19; Cinc. de Re Mil. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 5; Asell. ap. Gell. 2, 13, 4; Cic. Att. 2, 7, 4; id. Verr. 2, 2, 13, § 34; Caes. B. C. 1, 79, 2; Gai Inst. 2, 101; Pacat. Pan. 9 fin.:

cum a nostro Catone laudabar vel reprehendi me a ceteris facile patiebar,

Cic. Or. 13, 41; so Nep. Att. 9, 6.—To distinguish from adversative relations, as Cic. Rosc. Com. 3, 9; id. Att. 12, 39, 2; id. de Or. 1, 14, 62; Caes. B. C. 3, 44, 6; Gai Inst. 2, 254.—If only the clause with cum, but not the principal predicate, denotes repeated action, the latter is in the perf., the former in imperf. indic., Caes. B. C. 2, 17; Cic. Arch. 5, 10.—(2) Imperf. subj., mostly denoting circumstances to explain the main action: cum dilectus antiquitus fieret... tribunus militaris adigebat, etc., Cinc. de Re Mil. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 2:

Hortensius cum partiretur tecum causas, prorogandi locum semper tibi relinquebat,

Cic. Brut. 51, 190; id. Div. 1, 45, 102; id. de Or. 1, 54, 232; id. Brut. 62, 222; Liv. 3, 66, 2; 5, 25, 12:

ex hoc effectos panes, cum in colloquiis Pompeiani famem nostris objectarent, vulgo in eos jaciebant (causal),

Caes. B. C. 3, 48; Cic. Fin. 2, 19, 62; so,

according to class. usage,

Sen. Ep. 86, 11; Curt. 5, 2, 7; 6, 5, 18; 7, 3, 13; Suet. Caes. 65;

contrary to class. usage,

Val. Max. 3, 6, 6; Sen. Ep. 30, 7; 77, 8; Tac. H. 2, 91; Spart. Had. 18. —

In other instances (which are rare), both moods occur, either without any discrimination, or for special reasons. (1) Ante-class.:

nam quom modo exibat foras, ad portum se aibat ire,

Plaut. Rud. 2, 2, 2. —(2) Class.:

ut, cum L. Opimii causam defendebat, C. Carbo nihil de Gracchi nece negabat, sed id jure factum esse dicebat,

Cic. de Or. 2, 25, 106 (cf.:

nuper cum ego C. Sergii Oratae... causam defenderem, nonne omnis nostra in jure versata defensio est?

id. ib. 1, 39, 178; in each of these sentences the clause with cum sustains exactly the same relation to the principal predicate; but the former has the imperf. in the principal sentence, and in this connection Cic. prefers the indic. after cum):

similiter arbitror... illum (oratorem) de toto illo genere non plus quaesiturum esse, quid dicat, quam Polycletum illum, cum Herculem fingebat, quem ad modum pellem aut hydram fingeret (fingebat, for euphony, in view of the foll. fingeret),

id. de Or. 2, 16, 70; cf.:

nec vero ille artifex cum faceret Jovis formam... contemplabatur aliquem, e quo similitudinem duceret,

id. Or. 2, 9.—Without assignable reason:

casu, cum legerem tuas litteras, Hirtius erat apud me,

Cic. Att. 15, 1, 2; cf.:

Hasdrubal tum forte cum haec gerebantur, apud Syphacem erat,

Liv. 29, 31, 1:

cum haec Romae agebantur, Chalcide Antiochus ipse sollicitabat civitatium animos, etc.,

id. 36, 5, 1; cf.:

cum haec in Hispania gererentur, comitiorum jam appetebat dies,

id. 35, 8, 1 (Weissenb. gerebantur):

cum haec agebantur, Chalcide erat Antiochus,

id. 36, 15, 1; cf.:

cum haec agerentur jam consul via Labicana ad fanum Quietis erat,

id. 4, 41, 8; 35, 2, 1.—(3) PostAug. writers almost always use imperf. subj., disregarding the class. usage: ipsa fruebatur arte cum pingeret (cf. a, 2.), Sen. Ep. 9, 7; id. Cons. Marc. 23, 3; Plin. Pan. 34:

tunc erat mendacio locus cum ignota essent externa... nunc vero, etc. (opposition of times),

Sen. Q. N. 4, 2, 24; so id. Ep. 97, 9; Mart. 2, 61, 1; cf. Don. ad Ter. And. 3, 3, 13 (3. a. a, 1. supra):

cum haec proderem habebant et Caesares juvenes sturnum, etc.,

Plin. 10, 41, 59, § 120.—

If the principal predicate denotes a point of time, and the predicate with cum a period of time, the former is in the perf. indic. unless changed by construction; the latter

In the imperf. indic., according to the rules a. a, except 2. (1) When the time of the cum clause is opposed to other periods of time:

res quom animam agebat tum esse offusam oportuit,

Plaut. Trin. 4, 3, 85; id. Truc. 4, 2, 20; id. Ep. 3, 3, 50 (3, 4, 21); id. Most. 5, 1, 68:

quod cum res agebatur nemo in me dixit, id tot annis post tu es inventus qui diceres?

Cic. Phil. 2, 9, 22; id. Rep. 2, 23, 43; id. Div. 1, 41, 92; 1, 45, 101; id. Ac. 2, 28, 90; id. Quint. 19, 60; 17, 54; 19, 61; id. Verr. 2, 3, 90, § 210 et saep.; Liv. 22, 60, 25; Verg. A. 4, 597; Tib. 1, 10, 8; 1, 10, 19; Prop. 2, 1, 31; 5 (4), 10, 24.—The subj. may be used if the principal action is represented as a consequence or result:

o, Astaphium, haut isto modo solita's me ante appellare, Sed blande, quom illuc quod aput vos nunc est, aput me haberem,

Plaut. Truc. 1, 2, 60 (Lubbert conjectures habebam); Cic. Off. 2, 1, 2 and 3; id. Fin. 4, 27, 54; id. Rosc. Am. 4, 11; id. Verr. 2, 3, 57, § 130; id. Mur. 3, 8; Liv. 5, 53, 9; 10, 6, 9; 43, 21, 1;

44, 39, 7.— Hence the mood may change in co-ordinate clauses: tum, cum haberet haec res publica Luscinos, Calatinos, etc., homines... patientia paupertatis ornatos, et tum, cum erant Catones, Phili, etc., tamen hujusce modi res commissa nemini est (haberet, concessive),

Cic. Agr. 2, 24, 64.—(2) To make emphatic the coincidence of time, = eo ipso tempore (a. a, 4.):

cum is triumphus de Liguribus agebatur, Ligures... coloniam ipsam ceperunt,

Liv. 41, 14, 1; Cic. Sest. 26, 56; id. Phil. 2, 36, 90; id. Div. 2, 1, 3; id. Verr. 2, 5, 37, § 97; id. Att. 1, 4, 1.—(3) To preserve the peculiar force of the imperf. indic. (a. a, 3.): cum iste jam decedebat, ejus modi litteras ad eos misit, etc. (conative imperf.), Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 70, § 172:

cum Africanus censor tribu movebat centurionem... inquit,

id. de Or. 2, 67, 272 (cf.:

cum (censor) M. Antistio equum ademisset,

id. ib. 2, 71, 287).—

With the imperf. subj. (1) Always when cum means while (time during which): quomque caput caderet, carmen tuba sola peregit et, etc., Enn. ap. Lact. ad Stat. Th. 11, 56 (Ann. v. 508 Vahl.):

magistratus quom ibi adesset, occepta'st agi,

Ter. Eun. prol. 22 (Lubbert conjectures adsedit); Enn. ap. Macr. S. 6, 1 (Ann. v. 106 Vahl.):

Alexandrum uxor sua, cum simul cubaret, occidit,

Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 144:

armati, cum sui utrosque adhortarentur... in medium inter duas acies procedunt,

Liv. 1, 25, 1; Varr. R. R. 2, 81; Auct. Her. 4, 52, 65; Cic. Brut. 3, 10; id. Clu. 62, 175; Caes. B. G. 2, 19; id. B. C. 3, 57; Liv. 1, 30, 8; 10, 30, 3 et saep.—(2) To connect a logical (causal, etc.) relation with the temporal meaning (a. b, 1.):

cum ille Romuli senatus... temptaret ut ipse gereret sine rege rem publicam, populus id non tulit,

Cic. Rep. 2, 12, 23:

an pater familiarissimis suis succensuit cum Sullam et defenderent et laudarent? (causal),

id. Sull. 17, 49:

tum cum bello sociorum tota Italia arderet, homo non acerrimus... C. Norbanus in summo otio fuit (concessive),

id. Verr. 2, 5, 4, § 8:

quibus rebus cum unus in civitate maxime floreret, incidit in eandem invidiam, etc. (adversative),

Nep. Cim. 3, 1:

sed cum jam appropinquantium forma lemborum haud dubia esset... tunc injecta trepidatio est,

Liv. 44, 28, 10; Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 90, § 211; id. Clu. 31, 84; id. Mur. 3, 8; id. Phil. 3, 2, 3; id. Tusc. 1, 2, 4; Auct. Her. 4, 24, 33; Caes. B. C. 2, 7; Liv. 25, 9, 10; 21, 41, 12.—(3) To explain the main fact by circumstances:

quem quidem hercle ego, in exilium quom iret, redduxi domum,

Plaut. Merc. 5, 4, 19:

consule me, cum esset designatus tribunus, obtulit in discrimen vitam suam,

Cic. Sest. 28, 61:

haec epistula est, quam nos, in aedibus Apronii cum litteras conquireremus, invenimus,

id. Verr. 2, 3, 66, § 154: Socrates, cum XXX. tyranni essent, pedem porta non extulit, id. Att. 8, 2, 4:

Brundusii cum loquerer cum Phania, veni in eum sermonem ut dicerem, etc.,

id. Fam. 3, 5, 3:

itaque, cum populum in curias triginta divideret, nomina earum (Sabinarum) curiis imposuit,

Liv. 1, 13, 6:

Ap. Claudius, ovans cum in urbem iniret, decem milia pondo argenti, etc., in aerarium tulit,

id. 41, 28, 6; Cic. Clu. 20, 55; id. Phil. 12, 8, 20; id. Scaur. 47; id. Inv. 2, 31, 96; id. Tusc. 2, 22, 53; id. Div. 1, 52, 119; id. Off. 2, 8, 27; id. Or. 2, 55, 225 sq.; id. Fam. 1, 9, 13; 6, 6, 5; Liv. 1, 39, 4; 3, 63, 6; 4, 53, 11 et saep.—(4) To describe the place of the main action (a. a, 3.):

cum essem in castris ad fluvium Pyramum, redditae mihi sunt uno tempore a te epistulae duae,

Cic. Fam. 3, 11, 1;

so with cum essem (essemus, etc.),

id. ib. 2, 19, 1; 3, 4, 1; 13, 56, 1; id. Att. 1, 10, 1; 14, 19, 1; id. Ac. 1, 1, 1; id. Rep. 1, 39, 61; Varr. R. R. 3, 13; Caes. B. G. 4, 11 et saep.:

Eumenes rex ab Roma cum in regnum rediret... mactatus est ( = on the journey),

Liv. 42, 40, 8:

Agesilaus cum ex Aegypto reverteretur... in morbum implicitus decessit,

Nep. Ages. 8, 6.—The perf. indic. (cum fui, etc.) refers to temporary visits to a place:

Gallo narravi, cum proxime Romae fui, quid audissem,

Cic. Att. 13, 49, 2:

proxime cum in patria mea fui, venit ad me, etc.,

Plin. Ep. 4, 13, 3.—(5) To designate the time by natural occurrences (a. a, 4.):

ipsi comprehensi a me, cum jam dilucesceret, deducuntur,

Cic. Cat. 3, 3, 6:

cum advesperasceret, cum lucesceret,

id. Fam. 15, 4, 8:

cum lux appropinquaret,

id. Tull. 9, 21:

cum dies instaret,

id. Inv. 2, 31, 96:

cum comitiorum tempus adpeteret,

Liv. 28, 10, 1:

cum dies comitiorum adpropinquaret,

id. 3, 34, 7; 10, 13, 2.—But when a date is given as a point of time, the perf. indic. is used:

cum ea dies venit,

Liv. 4, 44, 10; 6, 20, 4.—(6) When the action of the cum clause is interrupted or ended by the main action:

cum hanc jam epistulam complicarem, tabellarii a vobis venerunt, etc.,

Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 5, § 17:

L. Octavius, cum multas jam causas diceret, adulescens est mortuus,

id. Brut. 68, 241:

cum plures jam tribus dicto esse audientem pontifici duumvirum juberent... ultimum de caelo quod comitia turbaret intervenit,

Liv. 40, 42, 10:

cum maxime conquereretur apud patres... repente strepitus ante curiam... auditur,

id. 8, 33, 4:

haec cum maxime dissereret, intervenit Tarquinius,

id. 1, 50, 7;

so with cum maxime,

Cic. Fam. 1, 5, a, 2; Liv. 23, 24, 6; 30, 33, 12.—(7) If the clause with cum has the force of a participial adjunct of the principal predicate (cum diceret = dicens, or dicendo):

Caesarem saepe accusavit, cum adfirmaret illum numquam, dum haec natio viveret, sine cura futurum ( = adfirmans, or adfirmando),

Cic. Sest. 63, 132:

Antigonus in proelio, cum adversus Seleucum dimicaret, occisus est ( = dimicans),

Nep. Reg. 3, 2:

impulit ut cuperem habere, cum diceret,

Varr. R. R. 3, 2, 8; Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 9 (11), 3; id. Clu. 42, 119; 56, 153; id. pro Corn. Maj. Fragm. 16; id. Mil. 5, 12; id. de Or. 1, 57, 243; id. Or. 37, 129; id. Fin. 1, 5, 16; id. Inv. 2, 34, 105; Val. Max. 1, 2, ext. 1; Ov. P. 1, 9, 42.—(8) In the historians, in a summary reference to events already related:

cum haec in Achaia atque apud Dyrrhachium gererentur... Caesar mittit, etc.,

Caes. B. C. 3, 57:

cum civitas in opere ac labore adsiduo reficiendae urbis teneretur, interim Q. Fabio... dicta dies est,

Liv. 6, 1, 6:

cum hic status in Boeotia esset, Perseus... misit,

id. 42, 56, 10; 33, 36, 1; 34, 22, 3; 38, 8, 1; 42, 64, 1; 45, 11, 1.—

In all other cases the imperf. subj. is regularly used in class. prose, even if the action of the clause with cum is logically independent of the principal sentence:

illum saepe audivi, hic, cum ego judicare jam aliquid possem, abfuit,

Cic. Brut. 71, 248: senatus consultum est factum de ambitu in Afranii sententiam, in quam ego dixeram, cum tu adesses. id. Q. Fr. 2, 7 (9), 3; so always (class.) with cum maxime, precisely when, just when:

cum maxime haec in senatu agerentur, Canuleius... (ad populum) ita disseruit,

Liv. 4, 3, 1:

cum maxime Capua circumvallaretur, Syracusarum oppugnatio ad finem venit,

id. 25, 23, 1.—In a very few instances the imperf. indic. occurs without apparent reason: an vero cum honos agebatur familiae vestrae... succensuit [p. 494] pater tuus cum Sullam defenderent (probably to distinguish the two cum clauses), Cic. Sull. 17, 49 (cf.:

cum jus amicitiae, societatis, adfinitatis ageretur, cum, etc., eo tempore tu non modo non... retulisti, sed ne ipse quidem, etc.,

id. Quint. 16, 53):

ille versus, qui in te erat collatus cum aedilitatem petebas,

id. Q. Fr. 1, 3, 8:

cum ex oppido exportabatur (Dianae statua) quem conventum mulierum factum esse arbitramini?... Quid hoc tota Sicilia est clarius quam omnes convenisse cum Diana exportaretur ex oppido? etc.,

id. Verr. 2, 4, 35, § 77.—Poets and post-class. writers frequently disregard the class. usage, the former by using either mood instead of the other, the latter by the un-Ciceronian use of the subj.; v. Prop. 2, 9, 15; 5 (4), 4, 10; Tib. 1, 10, 16; Verg. A. 7, 148; 12, 735; Mart. 13, 122; Curt. 8, 12, 16; 9, 2, 24; Quint. 11, 1, 89; Plin. 36, 6, 5, § 46; Dig. 28, 1, 22, § 1; Gell. strangely uses an imperf. indic. where class. writers would use a subj.:

sed ego, homines cum considerabam, alterum fidei, alterum probri plenum, nequaquam adduci potui ad absolvendum,

Gell. 14, 2, 10; cf.:

cum secum reputavit,

Tac. A. 15, 54.

In adverbial clauses denoting identity of action (if the principal sentence and the clause with cum denote not different actions, but one action, which, expressed by the latter clause, is by the principal sentence defined in its meaning and import, the clause with cum always takes the indic., except once or twice post-class., and almost always the same tense as the principal sentence), when, by, in, etc.

The predicate in present:

amice facis Quom me laudas,

Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 31; id. Poen. 3, 2, 12; 3, 5, 15; Ter. And. prol. 18; id. Ad. 1, 2, 16 et saep.:

bene facitis cum venitis,

Auct. Her. 4, 50, 63:

quae cum taces, nulla esse concedis,

Cic. Rosc. Am. 19, 54; 21, 58; id. Clu. 47, 132; Liv. 25, 6, 5 et saep.—

With fut. (rare):

cum igitur proferent aliquid hujusmodi... inventum proferent,

Cic. Inv. 1, 40, 75; id. Fl. 39, 99; Plin. Ep. 7, 24, 9.—

With fut. perf. (rare):

quod cum dederis, illud dederis ut is absolvatur,

Cic. Div. in Caecil. 7, 23; id. Lig. 12, 36; id. Part. Or. 39; Auct. Her. 4, 30, 41.—

With perf.:

fecisti furtum quom istaec flagitia me celavisti et patrem,

Plaut. Bacch. 1, 2, 60; 1, 2, 52; id. Cas. 4, 4, 18 (22); id. Capt. 2, 3, 52; Ter. Phorm. prol. 32 et saep.:

loco ille motus est cum ex urbe est depulsus,

Cic. Cat. 2, 1, 1; id. Verr. 2, 5, 23, § 59; id. Fam. 11, 29, 2; id. Rosc. Am. 14, 39; Liv. 5, 49, 8; 9, 8, 4; Val. Max. 3, 7, ext. 1; Curt. 6, 10, 9; Quint. 1, 10, 47 et saep.—

With histor. pres.:

Orestes cum se defendit, in matrem confert crimen,

Auct. Her. 1, 15, 25.—

With imperf.:

cum grandiorem aetatem ad consulatum constituebant, adulescentiae temeritatem verebantur,

Cic. Phil. 5, 17, 47; 14, 10, 28; id. Fl. 33, 83; id. Lig. 6, 18; id. Fam. 6, 1, 3; id. Off. 3, 10, 40; id. Sen. 6, 15 et saep.—

Imperf. with perf. ( poet. and post-class.;

very rare): quid quod et ominibus certis prohibebar amori Indulgere meo, tum cum mihi ferre jubenti Excidit et fecit spes nostras cera caducas,

Ov. M. 9, 595 sq.; Val. Max. 9, 1, 5.—